WO2003039341A2 - Methods and compositions to treat cardiovascular disease using 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 - Google Patents

Methods and compositions to treat cardiovascular disease using 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2003039341A2
WO2003039341A2 PCT/US2002/035538 US0235538W WO03039341A2 WO 2003039341 A2 WO2003039341 A2 WO 2003039341A2 US 0235538 W US0235538 W US 0235538W WO 03039341 A2 WO03039341 A2 WO 03039341A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
protein
expression
gene
cell
nucleic acid
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2002/035538
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2003039341A3 (en
Inventor
Thomas Joseph Logan
Miyoung Chun
Katherine M. Galvin
Original Assignee
Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. filed Critical Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
Priority to AU2002360343A priority Critical patent/AU2002360343A1/en
Priority to JP2003541439A priority patent/JP2005507673A/en
Priority to EP02795592A priority patent/EP1450666A4/en
Publication of WO2003039341A2 publication Critical patent/WO2003039341A2/en
Publication of WO2003039341A3 publication Critical patent/WO2003039341A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • G01N33/5008—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics
    • G01N33/502—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics for testing non-proliferative effects
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02—Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/04—Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/06—Antiarrhythmics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/12—Antihypertensives
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6876—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes
    • C12Q1/6883—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes for diseases caused by alterations of genetic material
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • G01N33/5008—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • G01N33/5008—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics
    • G01N33/5044—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics involving specific cell types
    • G01N33/5067—Liver cells
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/68—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids
    • G01N33/6893—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids related to diseases not provided for elsewhere
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
    • C12Q2600/136—Screening for pharmacological compounds
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
    • C12Q2600/156—Polymorphic or mutational markers
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
    • C12Q2600/158—Expression markers
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2500/00—Screening for compounds of potential therapeutic value
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00—Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/32—Cardiovascular disorders

Definitions

  • Cardiovascular disease is a major health risk throughout the industrialized world. Atherosclerosis, the most prevalent of cardiovascular diseases, is the principal cause of heart attack, stroke, and peripheral vascular disease resulting in significant disability and limb loss, and thereby the principle cause of death in the United States.
  • Atherosclerosis is a complex disease involving aspects of lipid metabolism and vascular inflammation. Both have significant effects on the initiation and progression of atherosclerosis. Irregular lipid metabolism is a very well established risk factor for atherosclerosis. Elevated low density lipoprotein (LDL), very low density lipoproteins (NLDL), triglycerides and low levels of high density lipoproteins (HDL) all independently contribute to atherosclerosis development and/or progression. There are a number of effective therapies currently being utilized in the clinic that result in lowering of these risk factors and, in turn decrease the rate of mortality and morbidity associated with atherosclerotic disease.
  • LDL low density lipoprotein
  • NLDL very low density lipoproteins
  • HDL high density lipoproteins
  • Some of these therapies include the cholesterol lowering drugs statins, the triglyceride lowering drugs fibrates and niacin and the triglyceride lowering/HDL raising PPAR alpha activators.
  • Atherosclerosis involves many cell types and molecular factors (described in, for example, Ross (1993) Nature 362: 801-809).
  • SMCs smooth muscle cells
  • the advanced lesions of atherosclerosis may occlude the artery concerned, and result from an excessive inflammatory-fibroproliferative response to numerous different forms of insult.
  • Injury or dysfunction of the vascular endothelium is a common feature of many conditions that predispose an individual to accelerated development of atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease.
  • hypertension contributes to atherosclerosis.
  • the identification of molecules that regulate blood pressure and vascular tone will be useful in discovering new therapies to treat cardiovascular diseases such as atherosclerosis.
  • the present invention provides methods and compositions for the diagnosis and treatment of cardiovascular disease.
  • disorders involving the heart or "cardiovascular disease” or a “cardiovascular disorder” include a disease or disorder which affects the cardiovascular system, e.g., the heart, the blood vessels, and/or the blood.
  • a cardiovascular disorder can be caused by an imbalance in arterial pressure, a malfunction of the heart, or an occlusion of a blood vessel, e.g., by a thrombus.
  • a cardiovascular disorder includes, but is not limited to disorders such as arteriosclerosis, atherosclerosis, cardiac hypertrophy, ischemia reperfusion injury, restenosis, arterial inflammation, vascular wall remodeling, ventricular remodeling, rapid ventricular pacing, coronary microembolism, tachycardia, bradycardia, pressure overload, aortic bending, coronary artery ligation, vascular heart disease, valvular disease, including but not limited to, valvular degeneration caused by calcification, rheumatic heart disease, endocarditis, or complications of artificial valves; atrial fibrillation, long-QT syndrome, congestive heart failure, sinus node dysfunction, angina, heart failure, hypertension, atrial fibrillation, atrial flutter, pericardial disease, including but not limited to, pericardial effusion and pericarditis; cardiomyopathies, e.g., dilated cardiomyopathy or idiopathic cardiomyopathy, myocardial infarction, coronary
  • an "endothelial cell disorder” includes a disorder characterized by aberrant, unregulated, or unwanted endothelial cell activity, e.g., proliferation, migration, angiogenesis, or vascularization; or aberrant expression of cell surface adhesion molecules or genes associated with angiogenesis, e.g., TBE-2, FLT and FLK.
  • Endothelial cell disorders include tumorigenesis, tumor metastasis, psoriasis, diabetic retinopathy, endometriosis, Grave's disease, ischemic disease (e.g., atherosclerosis), and chronic inflammatory diseases (e.g., rheumatoid arthritis).
  • a cardiovascular disease can also include thrombosis.
  • Thrombosis can result from platelet dysfunction, e.g. seen in myocardial infarction, angina, hypertension, lipid disorders, diabetes mellitus; myelodysplastic syndromes; myeloproliferative yndromes (including polycythemia vera and thombocythemia); thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpuras; HIN-induced platelet disorders (ADDS-Thrombocytopenia); heparin induced thrombocytopenia; mural cell alterations/interactions leading to platelet aggregation/degranulation, vascular endothelial cell activation/injury, monocyte/macrophage extravasation and smooth muscle cell proliferation; autoimmune disorders such as, but not limited to vasculitis, antiphospholipid syndromes, systemic lupus erythromatosis; inflammatory diseases, such as, but not limited to ilmmune activation; graft Ns host disease; radiation induced hypercoagulation; clotting factor dys
  • Treatment is defined as the application or administration of a therapeutic agent to a patient, or application or administration of a therapeutic agent to an isolated tissue or cell line from a patient, who has a disease or disorder, a symptom of disease or disorder or a predisposition toward a disease or disorder, with the purpose of curing, healing, alleviating, relieving, altering, remedying, ameliorating, improving or affecting the disease or disorder, at least one symptom of disease or disorder or the predisposition toward a disease or disorder.
  • a therapeutic agent includes, but is not limited to, small molecules, peptides, antibodies, ribozymes and antisense oligonucleotides. Representative molecules are described herein.
  • the present invention is based, at least in part, on the discovery that nucleic acid and protein molecules, (described infra), are differentially expressed in cardiovascular disease states relative to their expression in normal, or non-cardiovascular disease states.
  • the modulators of the molecules of the present invention, identified according to the methods of the invention can be used to modulate (e.g., inhibit, treat, or prevent) or diagnose cardiovascular disease, including, but not limited to, atherosclerosis and thrombosis.
  • differential expression includes both quantitative as well as qualitative differences in the temporal and/or tissue expression pattern of a gene.
  • a differentially expressed gene may have its expression activated or inactivated in normal versus cardiovascular disease conditions (for example, in an experimental cardiovascular disease system such as in an animal model for atherosclerosis).
  • the degree to which expression differs in normal versus cardiovascular disease or control versus experimental states need only be large enough to be visualized via standard characterization techniques, e.g., quantitative PCR, Northern analysis, subtractive hybridization.
  • the expression pattern of a differentially expressed gene may be used as part of a prognostic or diagnostic cardiovascular disease, e.g., artherosclerosis and/or thrombosis, evaluation, or may be used in methods for identifying compounds useful for the treatment of cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis.
  • a differentially expressed gene involved in cardiovascular disease may represent a target gene such that modulation of the level of target gene expression or of target gene product activity will act to cure, heal, alleviate, relieve, alter, remedy, ameliorate, improve or affect a cardiovascular disease condition, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis.
  • Compounds that modulate target gene expression or activity of the target gene product can be used in the treatment of cardiovascular disease.
  • the genes described herein may be differentially expressed with respect to cardiovascular disease, and/or their products may interact with gene products important to cardiovascular disease, the genes may also be involved in mechanisms important to additional cardiovascular cell processes.
  • the human 139 sequence (SEQ ID NO:l), (Gl: 181948, known also as endothelial differentiation protein (EDG-1)) which is approximately 2757 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1143 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 381 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:2) (Gl: 181949).
  • 139 As determined by TaqMan analysis, expression of 139 mRNA was seen in human liver, skin, tonsil, spleen, bone marrow and peripheral blood cells. When marmosets are treated with the statin cerivastatin, expression of 139 mRNA was reduced compared to a placebo.
  • Statins are used clinically for the reduction of cholesterol, a defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by statins in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. Therefore, 139 is predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of cerivastatin in lower cholesterol and triglyceride levels and is useful in the treatment of cardiovascular disease.
  • Gene ID 258 The human 258 sequence (SEQ TD NO:3), (Gl: 466488), known also as arginine vasopressin receptor (ANPR1)) which is approximately 1492 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1254 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 418 amino acid protein (SEQ ID ⁇ O:4) (GL667068).
  • SEQ ID ⁇ O:4 418 amino acid protein
  • 258 mRNA was repressed in the livers of monkeys fed a high cholesterol diet.
  • Cholesterol is a well- established risk factor for the development and progression of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by cholesterol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for disease progression and or initiation and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. Therefore, antagonists of 258 are predicted to lower cholesterol and triglyceride levels.
  • the human 1261 sequence (SEQ ID NO:5), (G 1813881, known also as NAK-1) which is approximately 2481 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1794 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 598 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:6) (GI: 1813882).
  • human 1261 mRNA was upregulated in human microvascular endothelial cells (FfMNEC) from the heart when they were treated with the pro-angiogenic factors vascular endothelial growth factor (NEGF), tumor necrosis factor alpha (T ⁇ F-alpha) and interleukin 1 beta (EL-lbeta). 1261 mR ⁇ A was also upregulated when HMNEC cells were treated with serum. These data indicate that 1261 mR ⁇ A is upregulated when exposed to pro-angiogenic factors which indicates that it plays a role in angiogenesis. When human umbilical vein endothelial cells were subjected to laminar flow sheer stress (a condition known to promote the formation of atherosclerosis) 1261 mRNA was increased compared to cells not exposed to sheer stress.
  • laminar flow sheer stress a condition known to promote the formation of atherosclerosis
  • Gene ID 1486 The human 1486 sequence (SEQ ID NO:7), (G 791187, known also as JNK activating kinase (JNKK1)) which is approximately 1310 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1197 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 399 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:8) (GL791188)..
  • expression of 1486 mRNA was found to be high in human liver as compared to other normal tissues tested.
  • Probucol is used clinically for the treatment of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by probucol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • Repression of 1486 is predicted to lower cholesterol and triglyceride levels and is thus useful in treating cardiovascular disease.
  • the human 2398 sequence (SEQ ID NO:9), (GL7363341, l ⁇ iown also as C-C chemokine receptor type 11 (CC CKR-11)) which is approximately 1113 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1050 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 350 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO: 10) (G 7363342).
  • LSS laminar shear stress
  • 2398 is upregulated in ECs by hypoxic conditions at 24h.
  • NEGF is upregulated at 6h.
  • 2398 is also upregulated by NEGF, its induction by hypoxia may be downstream of NEGF.
  • Modulators of 2398 expression would be useful in treating cardiovascular disorders including but not limited to atherosclerosis.
  • the human 2414 sequence (SEQ ID ⁇ O:ll), (G 1457938, known also as GPR68) which is approximately 1697 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1095 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 365 amino acid protein (SEQ ID ⁇ O:ll), (G 1457938, known also as GPR68)) which is approximately 1697 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1095 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 365 amino acid protein (SEQ ID ⁇ O:ll), (G 1457938, known also as GPR68)) which is approximately 1697 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1095 nucleotides, including the termination cod
  • TNFalpha, IL-1, and IFNgamma were used to stimulate either endothelial cells or monocyte/macrophages. These cytokines initiate/sustain the atherosclerotic pathogenesis.
  • Expression of 2414 mRNA is up-regulated in monkey atheroma samples compared to normal vessels. This was observed both quantitatively by TaqMan analysis and qualitatively by in situ hybridization. Six different monkey atheroma samples were compared with normal vessel for quantitative comparison of 2414 expression.
  • 2414 shows up-regulation during many in vivo and in vitro paradigms that mimic atherogenesis. Therefore, 2414 blockade will lower the lesion formation in atherosclerotic vessels thereby attenuating the progression of atherogenesis.
  • the human 7660 sequence (SEQ ID NO: 13), (G 2213808), known also as JA61) which is approximately 1181 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1152 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 384 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:14) GI:2213809).
  • 7660 mRNA As assessed by TaqMan analysis, expression of 7660 mRNA is restricted to normal human liver. In addition, 7660 mRNA was reduced in marmoset liver which had been treated with cerivastatin. Statins are used clinically for the reduction of cholesterol, a defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by statins in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • Regulation of 7660 is predicted to reduce total cholesterol and have beneficial effects against atherosclerosis and hyperlipidemias.
  • the human 8587 sequence (SEQ ID NO: 15), (GI:410213, known also as sodium/bile acid cotransporter) which is approximately 1580 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1047 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 349 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO: 16) (GL410214).
  • 8587 mRNA is high in human liver.
  • 8587 mRNA is upregulated by cholestyramine in vivo in marmoset liver model and by combination statin/fibrate therapy in vivo in marmoset liver model.
  • Cholestyramine is used clinically for the reduction of cholesterol, a defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by cholestyramine in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factors for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • Repression of 8587 is predicted to reduce total cholesterol and triglycerides and therefore has a role in cholesterol metabolism.
  • the human 10183 sequence (SEQ ID NO:17), (Gl: 189328, known also as ornithine aminotransferase) which is approximately 2013 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1317 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 439 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:18) (GL189329).
  • Probucol is used clinically for the treatment of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by probucol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • 10183 mRNA is also down-regulated by statin and PPAR agonists in vitro in primary human hepatocytes.
  • PPAR alpha agonists are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well- defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • High expression of 10183 mRNA was seen in human liver. Repression of 10183 polynucleotides or polypeptides is predicted to reduce total cholesterol and triglyceride levels and thus is useful in treating cardiovascular disease.
  • Gene ID 10550 The human 10550 sequence (SEQ ID NO: 19), (G 9409793, known also as succinyl-CoA-synthetase) which is approximately 1227 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 999 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 333 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:20) (G 9409794).
  • 10550 mRNA is repressed by probucol and cerivastatin/fenofibrate in in vivo marmoset models. Probucol is used clinically for the treatment of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by probucol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. High expression was also seen in human liver.
  • the human 12680 sequence (SEQ ID NO:21), (G 3006201, known also as prostaglandin transporter (PT)) which is approximately 4040 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1929 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 643 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:22)(GI: 1617590).
  • 12680 mRNA is repressed by probucol and cerivastatin/fenofibrate in in vivo marmoset models.
  • Probucol is used clinically for the treatment of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by probucol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. High expression was also seen in human liver.
  • the human 17921 sequence (SEQ ID NO:23) which is approximately 4897 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1518 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 506 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:24). (Partial sequence of 4312 nucleotides, known also as KIAA1382 is disclosed as G 7243144).
  • the rat ortholog of 17921 has been functionally characterized and shown to increase net levels of amino acids inside cells. It transports alanine with highest affinity, and also transports glutamine. Intracellular glutamine can inhibit the activity of endothelial nitric oxide synthase (eNOS).
  • eNOS endothelial nitric oxide synthase
  • Amino acid transporter 17921 is most highly expressed in endothelial cells, and is also highly expressed in vascular smooth muscle. In endothelial cells, expression of
  • 17921 is strongly and consistently upregulated by laminar shear stress. 17921 is highly expressed in all human vessels examined .
  • the net transfer of glutamine may be quite significant, and may result in reduced nitric oxide production.
  • Nitric oxide is a major vasodilator. Mice lacking eNOS have elevated blood pressure, increased succeptibility to atherosclerosis, and insufficient angiogenesis. Amino acid transporter 17921 may modulate the ability of endothelial cells to undergo angiogenesis by the additional mechanism of contributing to the amino acid pool available for protein synthesis. Gene ID 32248
  • the human 32248 sequence (SEQ ID NO:25), (GL8439650, known also as acetyl - CoA synthetase) which is approximately 2106 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 2103 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 701 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:26) (G 8439651).
  • 32248 mRNA was repressed by n-3 polyunsaturated fatty acid in monkey liver model. Dietary polyunsaturated fatty acid has been shown to protect against the development of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by polyunsaturated fatty acids in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. 32248 mRNA was up-regulated in liver by cholestyramine and the combination statin/fibrate therapy in marmoset liver model.
  • Cholestyramine is used clinically for the reduction of cholesterol, a defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by cholestyramine in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease.
  • Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
  • 32248 was highly expressed in human liver.
  • the human 60489 sequence (SEQ ID NO:27), which is approximately 1255 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1023 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 341 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:28).
  • 60489 mRNA expression is restricted to the liver, colon and small intestine in the human.
  • 60489 mRNA was upregulated in human hepatocytes that were treated with statins or PPAR alpha, either alone or in combination.
  • 60489 is a novel member of the diacylglycerol acyltransferase family. These molecules are known to play a key role in triglyceride biosynthesis. Targeted inhibition of 60489 would be predicted to result in decreased triglycerides and thus be protective against atherosclerosis and hyperlipidemia.
  • the human 93804 sequence (SEQ ID NO:29), (GT.4154286, known also as napsin A) which is approximately 1365 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1260 nucleotides, including the termination codon.
  • the coding sequence encodes a 420 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:30) (GI:4154287).
  • 93804 is regulated in in vitro and in vivo models of atherosclerosis as assessed by TaqMan analysis and in situ hybridization.93804 mRNA is up-regulated during lipid- loading in monocytes and macrophages.
  • mRNA is up-regulated during lipid- loading in monocytes and macrophages.
  • One of the hallmarks of the beginning of atherogenesis is the formation of lipid-laden macroophages.
  • 93804 shows transcriptional up-regulation during a lipid-loading paradigm in an in vitro monocyte/macrophage culture system. Multiple studies with multiple donors were performed. In one of the donor studies (donor one), the monocytes were stimulated with moderately oxdized LDL (ox- LDL) for various times; 6hours, 48 hours and 72 hours.
  • ox- LDL moderately oxdized LDL
  • the stimulation by the modified ox-LDL loads the lipids in monocytes.
  • 93804 exhibited minor up-regulation, 1.3X, during 6 hours stimulation via moderately oxdized LDL.
  • 93804 showed moderate up-regulation, 7.2X, during the lipid-loading process in monoctyes.
  • the monocytes were stimulated with various modified LDLs; mildly oxdized LDL, moderately oxdized LDL, and acetylated LDL. 93804 was upregulated by all three reagents.
  • 93804 was up-regulated in lesion the prone region of ApoE deficient vessels.
  • ApoE deficient animals form atherosclerotic lesions spontaneously. The lesions are formed in the aortic root area and an arch portion of the asending aorta while very little to no lesions are formed in the desending aorta.
  • 93804 showed greater expression in ApoE deficient animals in athero-lesion enriched region compared to non-lesion area of aorta. This was observed quantitatively by TaqMan experiments. In particular, the expression of 93804 was higher in the arch region of the aorta when it was compared to the region of the desending aorta.
  • 93804 was up-regulated in a monkey atheroma model. 93804 showed elevated expression in the monkey atheroma vessels compared to nomal vessels by TaqMan experiments. Among three normal monky vessels observed for this study, the expression of 93804 mRNA was not detected. Among six monkey atheroma vessels observed for this study, the expression of 93804 mRNA was detected in four atheroma samples.
  • 93804 shows very restricted expression among various human organs. The highest expression was found in lung. Low to midium expression was shown in tonsil, lymph node, brain and kidney.
  • Atherosclerosis is considered a chronic inflammatory disease, resulting from interaction between activated monocyte/macropohages, endothelial cells, smooth muscle cells, and humoral and cell-mediated immunological response of arterial wall. For this reason, the identification of genes that are involved in these vascular mechanisms can lead to novel and effective therapeutic targets to prevent atherosclerosis.
  • 93804 belongs to a family of aspartic proteases. Aspartic proteinases are classified by having two aspartic residues that are responsible for the catalytic mechanism. Several well-defined enzymes belong to this family of enzyme: Pepsin, gastricsin, renin, catehpsins, and HIV protease. During last three decades, the family of aspartic proteinases were studied intensely due to their important roles in physiology/pathophysiology.
  • 93804 shows up-regulation during lipid-loading process in monocytemacrophage suggesting its role in atherogenesis. 93804 blockade might lower the lesion formation in atherosclerotic vessels, thereby attenuating the progression of atherogenesis. 93804, is regulated in both in vitro and in vivo paradigms that represent the atherogenesis processes. 93804 is up-regulated during lipid-loading process in monocye/macropahge in an in vitro study. In addition, 93804 showed increased expression in ApoE deficient animals in athero-lesion enriched region compared to non-lesion area of aorta. These regulations strongly suggest the atherogenic effect of 93804. Therefore, inhibition of 93804 would result in a decrease in atherogenesis. Various aspects of the invention are described in further detail in the following subsections: I. Screening Assays:
  • the invention provides a method (also referred to herein as a "screening assay") for identifying modulators, i.e., candidate or test compounds or agents (e.g., peptides, peptidomimetics, small molecules (organic or inorganic) or other drugs) which bind to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, have a stimulatory or inhibitory effect on, for example, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414,
  • These assays are designed to identify compounds that bind to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, bind to other intracellular or extracellular proteins that interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, and interfere with the interaction of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein with other intercellular or extracellular proteins.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein ligand or substrate can, for example, be used to ameliorate cardiovascular diseases, e.g., atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, thrombosis and endothelial cell disorders.
  • cardiovascular diseases e.g., atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, thrombosis and endothelial cell disorders.
  • Such compounds may include, but are not limited to peptides, antibodies, or small organic or inorganic compounds. Such compounds may also include other cellular proteins.
  • Compounds identified via assays such as those described herein may be useful, for example, for ameliorating cardiovascular disease, e.g., athersclerosis and/or thrombosis.
  • cardiovascular disease condition results from an overall lower level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression and/or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein in a cell or tissue, compounds that interact with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein may include compounds which accentuate or amplify the activity of the bound 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414,
  • Such compounds would bring about an effective increase in the level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein activity, thus ameliorating symptoms.
  • mutations within the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene may cause aberrant types or excessive amounts of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins to be made which have a deleterious effect that leads to a cardiovascular disease.
  • physiological conditions may cause an excessive increase in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression leading to a cardiovascular disease.
  • compounds that bind to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein may be identified that inhibit the activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • Assays for testing the effectiveness of compounds identified by techniques such as those described in this section are discussed herein.
  • the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which are substrates of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or polypeptide or biologically active portion thereof.
  • the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which bind to or modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or polypeptide or biologically active portion thereof.
  • test compounds of the present invention can be obtained using any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the 'one-bead one-compound' library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection.
  • biological libraries include biological libraries; spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the 'one-bead one-compound' library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection.
  • the biological library approach is limited to peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, K.S. (1997) Anticancer Drug Des. 12:145).
  • an assay is a cell-based assay in which a cell which expresses a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is determined.
  • Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity can be accomplished by monitoring, for example, intracellular calcium, IP 3 , cAMP, or diacylglycerol concentration, the phosphorylation profile of intracellular proteins, cell proliferation and/or migration, gene expression of, for example, cell surface adhesion molecules or genes associated with angiogenesis, or the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -regulated transcription factor.
  • the cell can be of mammalian origin, e.g., an endothelial cell.
  • compounds that interact with a receptor domain can be screened for their ability to function as ligands, i.e., to bind to the receptor and modulate a signal transduction pathway. Identification of ligands, and measuring the activity of the ligand-receptor complex, leads to the identification of modulators (e.g., antagonists) of this interaction. Such modulators may be useful in the treatment of cardiovascular disease.
  • test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 binding to a substrate or to bind to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can also be determined.
  • Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 binding to a substrate can be accomplished, for example, by coupling the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate with a radioisotope or enzymatic label such that binding of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, ,12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 could also be coupled with a radioisotope or enzymatic label to monitor the ability of a test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 binding to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate in a complex.
  • Determining the ability of the test compound to bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be accomplished, for example, by coupling the compound with a radioisotope or enzymatic label such that binding of the compound to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be determined by detecting the labeled 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 compound in a complex.
  • compounds e.g., 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ligands or substrates
  • compounds can be labeled with 125 ⁇ 35s ; 14c, or ⁇ H, either directly or indirectly, and the radioisotope detected by direct counting of radioemmission or by scintillation counting.
  • Compounds can further be enzymatically labeled with, for example, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase, and the enzymatic label detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product.
  • a compound e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ligand or substrate
  • a compound e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 without the labeling of any of the interactants.
  • a microphysiometer can be used to detect the interaction of a compound with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921 , 32248, 60489 or 93804 without the labeling of either the compound or the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 (McConnell, H. M. et al (1992) Science 257:1906-1912.
  • a "microphysiometer” e.g., Cytosensor
  • LAPS light-addressable potentiometric sensor
  • an assay is a cell-based assay comprising contacting a cell expressing a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate) with a test compound and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate (e.g., stimulate or inhibit) the activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule.
  • a test compound e.g., stimulate or inhibit
  • Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can be accomplished, for example, by determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to bind to or interact with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule.
  • Determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or a biologically active fragment thereof, to bind to or interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can be accomplished by one of the methods described above for determining direct binding.
  • determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to bind to or interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can be accomplished by determining the activity of the target molecule.
  • the activity of the target molecule can be determined by detecting induction of a cellular second messenger of the target (i.e., intracellular Ca , diacylglycerol, IP 3 , cAMP), detecting catalytic/enzymatic activity of the target on an appropriate substrate, detecting the induction of a reporter gene (comprising a target-responsive regulatory element operatively linked to a nucleic acid encoding a detectable marker, e.g., luciferase), or detecting a target-regulated cellular response (e.g., gene expression).
  • a cellular second messenger of the target i.e., intracellular Ca , diacylglycerol, IP 3 , cAMP
  • detecting catalytic/enzymatic activity of the target on an appropriate substrate detecting the induction of a reporter gene (comprising a target-responsive regulatory element operatively linked to a nucleic acid encoding a detectable marker, e.g., luciferas
  • an assay of the present invention is a cell-free assay in which a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof, is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to bind to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof is determined.
  • Preferred biologically active portions of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins to be used in assays of the present invention include fragments which participate in interactions with non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 molecules, e.g., fragments with high surface probability scores.
  • Binding of the test compound to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be determined either directly or indirectly as described above.
  • the assay includes contacting the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound which binds 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248,
  • Compounds that modulate the interaction of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 with a known target protein may be useful in regulating the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, especially a mutant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • the assay is a cell-free assay in which a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate (e.g., stimulate or inhibit) the activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or, 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof is determined.
  • Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be accomplished, for example, by determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to bind to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule by one of the methods described above for determining direct binding.
  • Determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to bind to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can also be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C. (1991) Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al. (1995) Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol.
  • BIOS Biomolecular Interaction Analysis
  • BIOA is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore). Changes in the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
  • SPR surface plasmon resonance
  • determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be accomplished by determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to further modulate the activity of a downstream effector of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule.
  • the activity of the effector molecule on an appropriate target can be determined or the binding of the effector to an appropriate target can be determined as previously described.
  • the cell-free assay involves contacting a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound which binds the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to interact with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, wherein determining the ability of the test compound
  • Binding of a test compound to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, or interaction of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein with a target molecule in the presence and absence of a candidate compound can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants. Examples of such vessels include microtitre plates, test tubes, and micro-centrifuge tubes.
  • a fusion protein can be provided which adds a domain that allows one or both of the proteins to be bound to a matrix.
  • glutathione-S-transferase/139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion proteins or glutathione-S- transferase/target fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St.
  • the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, and the level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 binding or activity determined using standard techniques.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin.
  • Biotinylated 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or target molecules can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N- hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, IL), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical).
  • antibodies reactive with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or target molecules but which do not interfere with binding of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and unbound target or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation.
  • Methods for detecting such complexes include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or target molecule, as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or target molecule.
  • modulators of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression are identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein in the cell is determined.
  • the level of expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein in the absence of the candidate compound.
  • the candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression based on this comparison.
  • the candidate compound when expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein is greater (statistically significantly greater) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein expression.
  • the candidate compound when expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein is less (statistically significantly less) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein expression.
  • the level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein expression in the cells can be determined by methods described herein for detecting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein.
  • Such 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -binding proteins are also likely to be involved in the propagation of signals by the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 targets as, for example, downstream elements of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -mediated signaling pathway.
  • such 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -binding proteins are likely to be 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 inhibitors.
  • the two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains.
  • the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs.
  • the gene that codes for a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein is fused to a gene encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4).
  • a DNA sequence, from a library of DNA sequences, that encodes an unidentified protein ("prey” or “sample”) is fused to a gene that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor. If the "bait” and the “prey” proteins are able to interact, in vivo, forming a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -dependent complex, the DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity.
  • reporter gene e.g., LacZ
  • a reporter gene e.g., LacZ
  • Expression of the reporter gene can be detected and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the cloned gene which encodes the protein which interacts with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • the invention pertains to a combination of two or more of the assays described herein.
  • a modulating agent can be identified using a cell- based or a cell free assay, and the ability of the agent to modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be confirmed in vivo, e.g., in an animal such as an animal model for cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis, as described herein.
  • an agent identified as described herein e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulating agent, an antisense 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecule, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -specific antibody, or a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -specific antibody, or a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7
  • any of the compounds including but not limited to compounds such as those identified in the foregoing assay systems, may be tested for the ability to treat cardiovascular disease symptoms.
  • Cell-based and animal model-based assays for the identification of compounds exhibiting such an ability to ameliorate cardiovascular disease systems are described herein.
  • cell-based systems may be used to identify compounds which may act to treat at least one cardiovascular disease symptom.
  • such cell systems may be exposed to a compound, suspected of exhibiting an ability to treat cardiovascular disease symptoms, at a sufficient concentration and for a time sufficient to elicit such an amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms in the exposed cells.
  • the cells are examined to determine whether one or more of the cardiovascular disease cellular phenotypes has been altered to resemble a more normal or more wild type, non-cardiovascular disease phenotype.
  • Cellular phenotypes that are associated with cardiovascular disease states include aberrant proliferation and migration, angiogenesis, deposition of extracellular matrix components, accumulation of intracellular lipids, and expression of growth factors, cytokines, and other inflammatory mediators.
  • animal-based cardiovascular disease systems such as those described herein, may be used to identify compounds capable of ameliorating cardiovascular disease symptoms.
  • Such animal models may be used as test substrates for the identification of drugs, pharmaceuticals, therapies, and interventions which may be effective in treating cardiovascular disease.
  • animal models may be exposed to a compound, suspected of exhibiting an ability to ameliorate cardiovascular disease symptoms, at a sufficient concentration and for a time sufficient to elicit such an amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms in the exposed animals.
  • the response of the animals to the exposure may be monitored by assessing the reversal of disorders associated with cardiovascular disease, for example, by counting the number of atherosclerotic plaques and/or measuring their size before and after treatment.
  • any treatments which reverse any aspect of cardiovascular disease symptoms should be considered as candidates for human cardiovascular disease therapeutic intervention.
  • Dosages of test agents may be determined by deriving dose-response curves.
  • gene expression patterns may be utilized to assess the ability of a compound to ameliorate cardiovascular disease symptoms.
  • the expression pattern of one or more genes may form part of a "gene expression profile" or
  • transcriptional profile which may be then be used in such an assessment.
  • Gene expression profile or “transcriptional profile”, as used herein, includes the pattern of mRNA expression obtained for a given tissue or cell type under a given set of conditions.
  • Such conditions may include, but are not limited to, atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion, hypertension, restenosis, and arterial inflammation, including any of the control or experimental conditions described herein, for example, atherogenic cytokine stimulation of macrophages.
  • Gene expression profiles may be generated, for example, by utilizing a differential display procedure, Northern analysis and/or RT-PCR. In one embodiment,
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences may be used as probes and/or PCR primers for the generation and corroboration of such gene expression profiles.
  • Gene expression profiles may be characterized for known states, either cardiovascular disease or normal, within the cell- and/or animal-based model systems.
  • these known gene expression profiles may be compared to ascertain the effect a test compound has to modify such gene expression profiles, and to cause the profile to more closely resemble that of a more desirable profile.
  • administration of a compound may cause the gene expression profile of a cardiovascular disease model system to more closely resemble the control system.
  • Administration of a compound may, alternatively, cause the gene expression profile of a control system to begin to mimic a cardiovascular disease state.
  • a compound may, for example, be used in further characterizing the compound of interest, or may be used in the generation of additional animal models.
  • the cell- and animal-based model systems may be used to further characterize differentially expressed genes associated with cardiovascular disease, e.g., 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • animal- and cell-based assays may be used as part of screening strategies . designed to identify compounds which are capable of ameliorating cardiovascular disease symptoms, as described, below.
  • the animal- and cell-based models may be used to identify drugs, pharmaceuticals, therapies and interventions which may be effective in treating cardiovascular disease.
  • such animal models may be used to determine the LD50 and the ED50 in animal subjects, and such data can be used to determine the in vivo efficacy of potential cardiovascular disease treatments.
  • Animal-based model systems of cardiovascular disease may include, but are not limited to, non-recombinant and engineered transgenic animals.
  • Non-recombinant animal models for cardiovascular disease may include, for example, genetic models.
  • Such genetic cardiovascular disease models may include, for example, ApoB or ApoR deficient pigs (Rapacz, et al, 1986, Science 234:1573-1577) and Watanabe heritable hyperlipidemic (WHHL) rabbits (Kita et al, 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 84: 5928-5931).
  • WHHL Watanabe heritable hyperlipidemic
  • Non-recombinant, non-genetic animal models of atherosclerosis may include, for example, pig, rabbit, or rat models in which the animal has been exposed to either chemical wounding through dietary supplementation of LDL, or mechanical wounding through balloon catheter angioplasty.
  • Animal models of cardiovascular disease also include rat myocardial infarction models (described in, for example, Schwarz, ER et al (2000) J. Am. Coll Cardiol 35:1323-1330) and models of chromic cardiac ischemia in rabbits (described in, for example, Operschall, C et al. (2000) J. Appl. Physiol 88:1438- 1445).
  • animal models exhibiting cardiovascular disease symptoms may be engineered by using, for example, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences described above, in conjunction with techniques for producing transgenic animals that are well known to those of skill in the art.
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences may be introduced into, and overexpressed in, the genome of the animal of interest, or, if endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences are present, they may either be overexpressed or, alternatively, be disrupted in order to underexpress or inactivate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, such as described for the disruption of ApoE in mice (Plump et al, 1992, Cell 71: 343-353).
  • a host cell of the invention can also be used to produce non-human transgenic animals.
  • a host cell of the invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -coding sequences have been introduced.
  • Such host cells can then be used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences have been altered.
  • Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • a "transgenic animal” is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal includes a transgene.
  • transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, and the like.
  • a transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal, thereby directing the expression of an encoded gene product in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal.
  • a "homologous recombinant animal” is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a mouse, in which an endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene has been altered by homologous recombination between the endogenous gene and an exogenous DNA molecule introduced into a cell of the animal, e.g., an embryonic cell of the animal, prior to development of the animal.
  • a transgenic animal used in the methods of the invention can be created by introducing a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection, retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal.
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 cDNA sequence can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal.
  • a nonhuman homologue of a human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene such as a mouse or rat 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, can be used as a transgene.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene homologue such as another 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 family member, can be isolated based on hybridization to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 cDNA sequences and used as a transgene.
  • Intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression of the transgene.
  • a tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 transgene to direct expression of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to particular cells.
  • a transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 transgene in its genome and/or expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals.
  • a transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene.
  • transgenic animals carrying a transgene encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
  • a vector is prepared which contains at least a portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene.
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene can be a human gene but more preferably, is a non-human homologue of a human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene.
  • a rat 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene can be used to construct a homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule, e.g., a vector, suitable for altering an endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene in the mouse genome.
  • the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also referred to as a "knock out" vector).
  • the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered to thereby alter the expression of the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein).
  • the upstream regulatory region can be altered to thereby alter the expression of the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • the altered portion of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene is flanked at its 5' and 3' ends by additional nucleic acid sequence of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene to allow for homologous recombination to occur between the exogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene carried by the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule and an endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or
  • the additional flanldng 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid sequence is of sufficient length for successful homologous recombination with the endogenous gene.
  • several kilobases of flanldng DNA are included in the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule (see, e.g., Thomas, K.R. and Capecchi, M. R. (1987) Cell 51:503 for a description of homologous recombination vectors).
  • the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule is introduced into a cell, e.g., an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene are selected (see e.g., Li, E. et al. (1992) Cell 69:915).
  • the selected cells can then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, E.J. Robertson, ed. (IRL, Oxford, 1987) pp. 113-152).
  • a chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term.
  • Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene.
  • transgenic non-human animals for use in the methods of the invention can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene.
  • cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage PI.
  • cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage PI.
  • FLP recombinase system of Saccharomyces cerevisiae
  • Clones of the non-human transgenic animals described herein can also be produced according to the methods described in Wilmut, I. et al. (1997) Nature 385:810-813 and PCT International Publication Nos. WO 97/07668 and WO 97/07669.
  • a cell e.g., a somatic cell
  • the quiescent cell can then be fused, e.g., through the use of electrical pulses, to an enucleated oocyte from an animal of the same species from which the quiescent cell is isolated.
  • the reconstructed oocyte is then cultured such that it develops to morula or blastocyte and then transferred to pseudopregnant female foster animal.
  • the offspring borne of this female foster animal will be a clone of the animal from which the cell, e.g., the somatic cell, is isolated.
  • Such cardiovascular disease symptoms may include, for example, increased
  • specific cell types within the transgenic animals may be analyzed and assayed for cellular phenotypes characteristic of cardiovascular disease.
  • phenotypes include, but are not limited to cell proliferation, migration, angiogenesis, production of proinflammatory growth factors and cytokines, and adhesion to inflammatory cells.
  • monocytes such phenotypes may include but are not limited to increases in rates of LDL uptake, adhesion to endothelial cells, transmigration, foam cell formation, fatty streak formation, and production of foam cell specific products.
  • Cellular phenotypes may include a particular cell type's pattern of expression of genes associated with cardiovascular disease as compared to known expression profiles of the particular cell type in animals exhibiting cardiovascular disease symptoms.
  • Such cells may include non-recombinant monocyte cell lines, such as U937 (ATCC# CRL-1593), THP-1 (ATCC#TIB-202), and P388Dl (ATCC# TB3-63); endothelial cells such as human umbilical vein endothelial cells (HUNECs), human microvascular endothelial cells (HMVEC), and bovine aortic endothelial cells (BAECs); as well as generic mammalian cell lines such as HeLa cells and COS cells, e.g., COS-7 (ATCC# CRL-1651). Further, such cells may include recombinant, transgenic cell lines.
  • monocyte cell lines such as U937 (ATCC# CRL-1593), THP-1 (ATCC#TIB-202), and P388Dl (ATCC# TB3-63)
  • endothelial cells such as human umbilical vein endothelial cells (HUNECs), human microvascular endothelial cells (HMVEC
  • the cardiovascular disease animal models of the invention may be used to generate cell lines, containing one or more cell types involved in cardiovascular disease, that can be used as cell culture models for this disorder. While primary cultures derived from the cardiovascular disease transgenic animals of the invention may be utilized, the generation of continuous cell lines is preferred. For examples of techniques which may be used to derive a continuous cell line from the transgenic animals, see Small et al, (1985) Mol Cell Biol 5:642-648.
  • cells of a cell type known to be involved in cardiovascular disease may be transfected with sequences capable of increasing or decreasing the amount of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression within the cell.
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences may be introduced into, and overexpressed in, the genome of the cell of interest, or, if endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences are present, they may be either overexpressed or, alternatively disrupted in order to underexpress or inactivate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183
  • 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene the coding portion of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene may be ligated to a regulatory sequence which is capable of driving gene expression in the cell type of interest, e.g., an endothelial cell.
  • a regulatory sequence which is capable of driving gene expression in the cell type of interest, e.g., an endothelial cell.
  • Such regulatory regions will be well known to those of skill in the art, and may be utilized in the absence of undue experimentation. Recombinant methods for expressing target genes are described above.
  • an endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequence such a sequence may be isolated and engineered such that when reintroduced into the genome of the cell type of interest, the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 alleles will be inactivated.
  • the engineered 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence is introduced via gene targeting such that the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence is disrupted upon integration of the engineered 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence into the cell's genome. Transfection of host cells with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genes is discussed, above.
  • Cells treated with compounds or transfected with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genes can be examined for phenotypes associated with cardiovascular disease.
  • phenotypes include but are not limited to increases in rates of LDL uptake, adhesion to endothelial cells, transmigration, foam cell formation, fatty streak formation, and production by foam cells of growth factors such as bFGF, IGF-I, VEGF, IL-1, M-CSF.
  • Transmigration rates may be measured using the in vitro system of Navab et al. (1988) J. Clin. Invest. 82:1853-1863, by quantifying the number of monocytes that migrate across the endothelial monolayer and into the collagen layer of the subendothelial space.
  • endothelial cells can be treated with test compounds or transfected with genetically engineered 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genes.
  • the endothelial cells can then be examined for phenotypes associated with cardiovascular disease, including, but not limited to changes in cellular morphology, cell proliferation, cell migration, and mononuclear cell adhesion; or for the effects on production of other proteins involved in cardiovascular disease such as adhesion molecules (e.g., ICAM, VCAM, E-selectin), growth factors and cytokines (e.g., PDGF, IL-l ⁇ , TNF ⁇ , MCF), and proteins involved in angiogenesis (e.g., FLK, FLT).
  • adhesion molecules e.g., ICAM, VCAM, E-selectin
  • growth factors and cytokines e.g., PDGF, IL-l ⁇ , TNF ⁇ , MCF
  • proteins involved in angiogenesis e.g., FLK, FLT.
  • Transfection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid may be accomplished by using standard techniques (described in, for example, Ausubel (1989) supra).
  • Transfected cells should be evaluated for the presence of the recombinant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences, for expression and accumulation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA, and for the presence of recombinant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein production.
  • a decrease in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression is desired, standard techniques may be used to demonstrate whether a decrease in endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression and/or in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein production is achieved.
  • Cellular models for the study of cardiovascular disease and angiogenesis include models of endothelial cell differentiation on Matrigel (Baatout, S. et al. (1996) Rom. J. Intern. Med. 34:263-269; Benelli, R et al. (1999) Int. J. Biol Markers 14:243-246), embryonic stem cell models of vascular morphogenesis (Doetschman, T. et al. (1993) Hypertension 22:618-629), the culture of microvessel fragments in physiological gels (Hoying, JB et al. (1996) In Vitro Cell Dev. Biol. Anim. 32: 409-419; US Patent No.
  • the present invention also pertains to the field of predictive medicine in which diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, and monitoring clinical trials are used for prognostic (predictive) purposes to thereby treat an individual prophylactically. Accordingly, one aspect of the present invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein and/or nucleic acid expression as well as 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, in the context of a biological sample (e.g., blood, serum, cells, e.g., endothelial cells, or tissue, e.g., vascular tissue) to thereby determine whether an individual is afflicted with a cardiovascular disease.
  • a biological sample e
  • the invention also provides for prognostic (or predictive) assays for determining whether an individual is at risk of developing a cardiovascular disorder. For example, mutations in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene can be assayed for in a biological sample. Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive purpose to thereby phophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset of a cardiovascular disorder, e.g., atherosclerosis.
  • a cardiovascular disorder e.g., atherosclerosis.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to monitoring the influence of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulators (e.g., anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ribozymes) on the expression or activity of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 in clinical trials.
  • modulators e.g., anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414
  • a biological sample may be obtained from a subject and the biological sample may be contacted with a compound or an agent capable of detecting a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA or genomic DNA) that encodes a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, in the biological sample.
  • nucleic acid e.g., mRNA or genomic DNA
  • a preferred agent for detecting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or genomic DNA is a labeled nucleic acid probe capable of hybridizing to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or genomic DNA.
  • the nucleic acid probe can be, for example, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid set forth in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 15, 20, 25, 30, 25, 40, 45, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or genomic DNA.
  • Other suitable probes for use in the diagnostic assays of the invention are described herein.
  • 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein in a sample is an antibody capable of binding to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, preferably an antibody with a detectable label.
  • Antibodies can be polyclonal, or more preferably, monoclonal. An intact antibody, or a fragment thereof (e.g., Fab or F(ab')2) can be used.
  • labeled with regard to the probe or antibody, is intended to encompass direct labeling of the probe or antibody by coupling (i.e., physically linking) a detectable substance to the probe or antibody, as well as indirect labeling of the probe or antibody by reactivity with another reagent that is directly labeled.
  • indirect labeling include detection of a primary antibody using a fluorescently labeled secondary antibody and end-labeling of a DNA probe with biotin such that it can be detected with fluorescently labeled streptavidin.
  • biological sample is intended to include tissues, cells, and biological fluids isolated from a subject, as well as tissues, cells, and fluids present within a subject. That is, the detection method of the invention can be used to detect 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA, protein, or genomic DNA in a biological sample in vitro as well as in vivo.
  • in vitro techniques for detection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations.
  • in vitro techniques for detection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein include enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence.
  • In vitro techniques for detection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genomic DNA include Southern hybridizations.
  • in vivo techniques for detection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein include introducing into a subject a labeled anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody.
  • the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques.
  • the methods further involve obtaining a control biological sample from a control subject, contacting the control sample with a compound or agent capable of detecting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA, or genomic DNA, such that the presence of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA or genomic DNA is detected in the biological sample, and comparing the presence of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA or genomic DNA in
  • the present invention further pertains to methods for identifying subjects having or at risk of developing a cardiovascular disease associated with aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity.
  • the term "aberrant” includes a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity which deviates from the wild type 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity.
  • Aberrant expression or activity includes increased or decreased expression or activity, as well as expression or activity which does not follow the wild type developmental pattern of expression or the subcellular pattern of expression.
  • aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity is intended to include the cases in which a mutation in the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene causes the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene to be under-expressed or over-expressed and situations in which such mutations result in a non-functional 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or a protein which does not function in a wild-type fashion,
  • the assays described herein can be used to identify a subject having or at risk of developing a cardiovascular disease, e.g., including but not limited to, atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, and endothelial cell disorders.
  • a biological sample may be obtained from a subject and tested for the presence or absence of a genetic alteration.
  • such genetic alterations can be detected by ascertaining the existence of at least one of 1) a deletion of one or more nucleotides from a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, 2) an addition of one or more nucleotides to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, 3) a substitution of one or more nucleotides of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, 4) a chromosomal rearrangement of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183,
  • a genetic alteration in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene may be detected using a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • This method includes collecting a biological sample from a subject, isolating nucleic acid (e.g., genomic DNA, mRNA or both) from the sample, contacting the nucleic acid sample with one or more primers which specifically hybridize to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene under conditions such that hybridization and amplification of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene (if present) occurs, and detecting the presence or absence of an amplification product, or detecting the size of the amplification product and comparing the length to a control sample. It is anticipated that PCR and/or LCR may be desirable to use as a preliminary amplification step in conjunction with any of the techniques used for detecting mutations
  • nucleic acid
  • Alternative amplification methods include: self sustained sequence replication (Guatelli, J.C. et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:1874-1878), transcriptional amplification system (Kwoh, D.Y. et al. (1989) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 86:1173 177), Q-Beta Replicase (Lizardi, P.M. et al. (1988) Bio-Technology 6:1197), or any other nucleic acid amplification method, followed by the detection of the amplified molecules using techniques well known to those of skill in the art. These detection schemes are especially useful for the detection of nucleic acid molecules if such molecules are present in very low numbers.
  • mutations in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene from a biological sample can be identified by alterations in restriction enzyme cleavage patterns.
  • sample and control DNA is isolated, amplified (optionally), digested with one or more restriction endonucleases, and fragment length sizes are determined by gel electrophoresis and compared. Differences in fragment length sizes between sample and control DNA indicates mutations in the sample DNA.
  • sequence specific ribozymes see, for example, U.S. Patent No.
  • 5,498,531 can be used to score for the presence of specific mutations by development or loss of a ribozyme cleavage site.
  • genetic mutations in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be identified by hybridizing biological sample derived and control nucleic acids, e.g., DNA or RNA, to high density arrays containing hundreds or thousands of oligonucleotide probes (Cronin, M.T. et al. (1996) Human Mutation 7:244-255; Kozal, M.J. et al. (1996) Nature Medicine 2:753-759).
  • genetic mutations in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be identified in two dimensional arrays containing light-generated DNA probes as described in Cronin, M.T. et al. (1996) supra. Briefly, a first hybridization array of probes can be used to scan through long stretches of DNA in a sample and control to identify base changes between the sequences by making linear arrays of sequential, overlapping probes. This step allows for the identification of point mutations. This step is followed by a second hybridization array that allows for the characterization of specific mutations by using smaller, specialized probe arrays complementary to all variants or mutations detected.
  • Each mutation array is composed of parallel probe sets, one complementary to the wild-type gene and the other complementary to the mutant gene.
  • any of a variety of sequencing reactions known in the art can be used to directly sequence the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene in a biological sample and detect mutations by comparing the sequence of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 in the biological sample with the corresponding wild-type (control) sequence.
  • sequencing reactions include those based on techniques developed by Maxam and Gilbert (1977) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 74:560) or Sanger (1977) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 74:5463). It is also contemplated that any of a variety of automated sequencing procedures can be utilized when performing the diagnostic assays (Naeve, C. W. (1995) Biotechniques 19:448-53), including sequencing by mass spectrometry (see, e.g., PCT International Publication No. WO 94/16101; Cohen et al. (1996) Adv. Chromatogr. 36:127-162; and Griffin et al. (1993) Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol 38:147-159).
  • the art technique of "mismatch cleavage” starts by providing heteroduplexes formed by hybridizing (labeled) RNA or DNA containing the wild-type 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence with potentially mutant RNA or DNA obtained from a tissue sample.
  • the double-stranded duplexes are treated with an agent which cleaves single-stranded regions of the duplex such as which will exist due to basepair mismatches between the control and sample strands.
  • RNA/DNA duplexes can be treated with RNase and DNA/DNA hybrids treated with SI nuclease to enzymatically digest the mismatched regions.
  • either DNA/DNA or RNA/DNA duplexes can be treated with hydroxylamine or osmium tetroxide and with piperidine in order to digest mismatched regions. After digestion of the mismatched regions, the resulting material is then separated by size on denaturing polyacrylamide gels to determine the site of mutation. See, for example, Cotton et al. (1988) Proc. Natl Acad Sci USA 85:4397 and Saleeba et al. (1992) Methods Enzymol. 217:286-295.
  • the control DNA or RNA can be labeled for detection.
  • the mismatch cleavage reaction employs one or more proteins that recognize mismatched base pairs in double-stranded DNA (so called "DNA mismatch repair" enzymes) in defined systems for detecting and mapping point mutations in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 cDNAs obtained from samples of cells.
  • DNA mismatch repair proteins that recognize mismatched base pairs in double-stranded DNA
  • the mutY enzyme of E. coli cleaves A at G/A mismatches and the thymidine DNA glycosylase from HeLa cells cleaves T at G/T mismatches (Hsu et al. (1994) Car ino genesis 15:1657-1662).
  • a probe based on a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence e.g., a wild-type 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence, is hybridized to a cDNA or other DNA product from a test cell(s).
  • the duplex is treated with a DNA mismatch repair enzyme, and the cleavage products, if any, can be detected from electrophoresis protocols or the like. See, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5,459,039.
  • alterations in electrophoretic mobility will be used to identify mutations in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genes.
  • SSCP single strand conformation polymorphism
  • SSCP single strand conformation polymorphism
  • Single-stranded DNA fragments of sample and control 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acids will be denatured and allowed to renature.
  • the secondary structure of single-stranded nucleic acids varies according to sequence, the resulting alteration in electrophoretic mobility enables the detection of even a single base change.
  • the DNA fragments may be labeled or detected with labeled probes.
  • the sensitivity of the assay may be enhanced by using RNA (rather than DNA), in which the secondary structure is more sensitive to a change in sequence.
  • the subject method utilizes heteroduplex analysis to separate double stranded heteroduplex molecules on the basis of changes in electrophoretic mobility (Keen et al. (1991) Trends Genet 7:5).
  • the movement of mutant or wild-type fragments in polyacrylamide gels containing a gradient of denaturant is assayed using denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (DGGE) (Myers et al. (1985) N ⁇ twre 313:495).
  • DGGE denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis
  • D ⁇ A will be modified to ensure that it does not completely denature, for example by adding a GC clamp of approximately 40 bp of high- melting GC-rich D ⁇ A by PCR.
  • a temperature gradient is used in place of a denaturing gradient to identify differences in the mobility of control and sample D ⁇ A (Rosenbaum and Reissner (1987) Biophys Chem 265:12753).
  • oligonucleotide primers may be prepared in which the known mutation is placed centrally and then hybridized to target D ⁇ A under conditions which permit hybridization only if a perfect match is found (Saiki et al. (1986) Nature 324:163); Saiki et al. (1989) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci USA 86:6230).
  • Such allele specific oligonucleotides are hybridized to PCR amplified target D ⁇ A or a number of different mutations when the oligonucleotides are attached to the hybridizing membrane and hybridized with labeled target D ⁇ A.
  • Oligonucleotides used as primers for specific amplification may carry the mutation of interest in the center of the molecule (so that amplification depends on differential hybridization) (Gibbs et al. (1989) Nucleic Acids Res. 17:2437-2448) or at the extreme 3' end of one primer where, under appropriate conditions, mismatch can prevent, or reduce polymerase extension (Prossner (1993) Tibtech 11:238).
  • amplification may also be performed using Taq ligase for amplification (Barany (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 88:189). In such cases, ligation will occur only if there is a perfect match at the 3' end of the 5' sequence making it possible to detect the presence of a known mutation at a specific site by looking for the presence or absence of amplification.
  • the prognostic assays described herein can be used to determine whether a subject can be administered a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator (e.g., an agonist, antagonist, peptidomimetic, protein, peptide, nucleic acid, or small molecule) to effectively treat a cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis.
  • a cardiovascular disease e.g., atherosclerosis.
  • the present invention further provides methods for determining the effectiveness of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator identified herein) in treating a cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis, in a subject.
  • a cardiovascular disease e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis
  • the effectiveness of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator in increasing 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, protein levels, or in upregulating 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, can be monitored in clinical trials of subjects exhibiting decreased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, protein levels, or downregulated 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183
  • the effectiveness of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator in decreasing 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, protein levels, or in downregulating 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity can be monitored in clinical trials of subjects exhibiting increased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, protein levels, or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550
  • the expression or activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene can be used as a "read out" or marker of the phenotype of a particular cell, e.g., a vascular endothelial cell.
  • genes including 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 , that are modulated in cells by treatment with an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity (e.g., identified in a screening assay as described herein) can be identified.
  • cells can be isolated and RNA prepared and analyzed for the levels of expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 and other genes implicated in the cardiovascular disease.
  • the levels of gene expression can be quantified by Northern blot analysis or RT-PCR, as described herein, or alternatively by measuring the amount of protein produced, by one of the methods described herein, or by measuring the levels of activity of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 or other genes.
  • the gene expression pattern can serve as a marker, indicative of the physiological response of the cells to the agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • This response state may be determined before, and at various points during treatment of the individual with the agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • the present invention provides a method for monitoring the effectiveness of treatment of a subject with an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity (e.g., an agonist, antagonist, peptidomimetic, protein, peptide, nucleic acid, or small molecule identified by the screening assays described herein) including the steps of (i) obtaining a pre-administration sample from a subject prior to administration of the agent; (ii) detecting the level of expression of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA, or genomic DNA in the pre-administration sample; (iii) obtaining one or more post-administration samples from the subject; (iv) detecting the level of expression or activity of
  • increased administration of the agent may be desirable to increase the expression or activity of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 to higher levels than detected, i.e., to increase the effectiveness of the agent.
  • decreased administration of the agent may be desirable to decrease expression or activity of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 to lower levels than detected, i.e. to decrease the effectiveness of the agent.
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity may be used as an indicator of the effectiveness of an agent, even in the absence of an observable phenotypic response.
  • the present invention provides for both prophylactic and therapeutic methods of treating a subject, e.g., a human, at risk of (or susceptible to) a cardiovascular disease such as atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, thrombosis, and endothelial cell disorders.
  • a cardiovascular disease such as atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, thrombosis, and endothelial cell disorders.
  • a cardiovascular disease such as atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, thrombosis, and endothelial cell disorders.
  • a cardiovascular disease such as atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, thrombosis, and endothelial cell disorders.
  • the term refers to the study of how a patient's genes determine his or her response to a drug (e.g., a patient's "drug response phenotype", or "drug response genotype”).
  • a drug response genotype e.g., a patient's "drug response phenotype", or "drug response genotype”
  • another aspect of the invention provides methods for tailoring an subject's prophylactic or therapeutic treatment with either the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulators according to that individual's drug response genotype.
  • Pharmacogenomics allows a clinician or physician to target prophylactic or therapeutic treatments to patients who will most benefit from the treatment and to avoid treatment of patients who will experience toxic drug-related side effects.
  • the invention provides a method for preventing in a subject, a cardiovascular disease by administering to the subject an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, e.g., modulation of calcium influx, cellular migration, or formation of atherosclerotic lesions.
  • Subjects at risk for a cardiovascular disease can be identified by, for example, any or a combination of the diagnostic or prognostic assays described herein.
  • Administration of a prophylactic agent can occur prior to the manifestation of symptoms characteristic of aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity, such that a cardiovascular disease is prevented or, alternatively, delayed in its progression.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 aberrancy
  • the appropriate agent can be determined based on screening assays described herein.
  • cardiovascular disease symptoms may be ameliorated.
  • Certain cardiovascular diseases are brought about, at least in part, by an excessive level of a gene product, or by the presence of a gene product exhibiting an abnormal or excessive activity. As such, the reduction in the level and/or activity of such gene products would bring about the amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms.
  • Techniques for the reduction of gene expression levels or the activity of a protein are discussed below.
  • certain other cardiovascular diseases are brought about, at least in part, by the absence or reduction of the level of gene expression, or a reduction in the level of a protein's activity. As such, an increase in the level of gene expression and/or the activity of such proteins would bring about the amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms.
  • the up-regulation of a gene in a disease state reflects a protective role for that gene product in responding to the disease condition. Enhancement of such a gene's expression, or the activity of the gene product, will reinforce the protective effect it exerts.
  • Some cardiovascular disease states may result from an abnormally low level of • activity of such a protective gene. In these cases also, an increase in the level of gene expression and/or the activity of such gene products would bring about the amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms. Techniques for increasing target gene expression levels or target gene product activity levels are discussed herein.
  • another aspect of the invention pertains to methods of modulating 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity for therapeutic purposes.
  • the modulatory method of the invention involves contacting a cell with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 or agent that modulates one or more of the activities of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein activity associated with the cell (e.g., an endothelial cell or an ovarian cell).
  • the cell e.g., an endothelial cell or an ovarian cell.
  • An agent that modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein activity can be an agent as described herein, such as a nucleic acid or a protein, a naturally-occurring target molecule of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ligand or substrate), a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ligand or substrate),
  • the agent stimulates one or more 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activities.
  • stimulatory agents include active 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein and a nucleic acid molecule encoding 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 that has been introduced into the cell.
  • the agent inhibits one or more 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activities.
  • inhibitory agents include antisense 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules, anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies, and 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 inhibitors.
  • modulatory methods can be performed in vitro (e.g., by culturing the cell with the agent) or, alternatively, in vivo (e.g., by administering the agent to a subject).
  • the present invention provides methods of treating an individual afflicted with a disease or disorder characterized by aberrant or unwanted expression or activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or nucleic acid molecule.
  • the method involves administering an agent (e.g., an agent identified by a screening assay described herein), or combination of agents that modulates (e.g., upregulates or downregulates) 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity.
  • an agent e.g., an agent identified by a screening assay described herein
  • agents that modulates e.g., upregulates or downregulates
  • the method involves administering a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or nucleic acid molecule as therapy to compensate for reduced, aberrant, or unwanted 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity.
  • Stimulation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is desirable in situations in which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 is abnormally downregulated and/or in which increased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is likely to have a beneficial effect.
  • inhibition of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is desirable in situations in which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 is abnormally upregulated and/or in which decreased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is likely to have a beneficial effect.
  • compounds such as those identified through assays described above, which exhibit inhibitory activity, may be used in accordance with the invention to ameliorate cardiovascular disease symptoms.
  • Such molecules may include, but are not limited to, small organic molecules, peptides, antibodies, and the like.
  • compounds can be administered that compete with endogenous ligand for the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • the resulting reduction in the amount of ligand- bound 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein will modulate endothelial cell physiology.
  • soluble proteins or peptides such as peptides comprising one or more of the extracellular domains, or portions and/or analogs thereof, of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, including, for example, soluble fusion proteins such as Ig-tailed fusion proteins.
  • Ig-tailed fusion proteins see, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,116,964
  • compounds such as ligand analogs or antibodies, that bind to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 receptor site, but do not activate the protein, (e.g., receptor-ligand antagonists) can be effective in inhibiting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein activity.
  • receptor-ligand antagonists can be effective in inhibiting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein activity.
  • antisense and ribozyme molecules which inhibit expression of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene may also be used in accordance with the invention to inhibit aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene activity.
  • triple helix molecules may be utilized in inhibiting aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene activity.
  • the antisense nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention are typically administered to a subject or generated in situ such that they hybridize with or bind to cellular mRNA and/or genomic DNA encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to thereby inhibit expression of the protein, e.g., by inhibiting transcription and/or translation.
  • the hybridization can be by conventional nucleotide complementarity to form a stable duplex, or, for example, in the case of an antisense nucleic acid molecule which binds to DNA duplexes, through specific interactions in the major groove of the double helix.
  • An example of a route of administration of antisense nucleic acid molecules of the invention include direct injection at a tissue site.
  • antisense nucleic acid molecules can be modified to target selected cells and then administered systemically.
  • antisense molecules can be modified such that they specifically bind to receptors or antigens expressed on a selected cell surface, e.g., by linking the antisense nucleic acid molecules to peptides or antibodies which bind to cell surface receptors or antigens.
  • the antisense nucleic acid molecules can also be delivered to cells using the vectors described herein.
  • vector constructs in which the antisense nucleic acid molecule is placed under the control of a strong pol II or pol III promoter are preferred.
  • an antisense nucleic acid molecule used in the methods of the invention is an ⁇ -anomeric nucleic acid molecule.
  • An ⁇ -anomeric nucleic acid molecule forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual ⁇ -units, the strands run parallel to each other (Gaultier et al (1987) Nucleic Acids. Res. 15:6625-6641).
  • the antisense nucleic acid molecule can also comprise a 2'-o-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al. (1987) Nucleic Acids Res.
  • an antisense nucleic acid used in the methods of the invention is a ribozyme.
  • Ribozymes are catalytic RNA molecules with ribonuclease activity which are capable of cleaving a single-stranded nucleic acid, such as an mRNA, to which they have a complementary region.
  • ribozymes e.g., hammerhead ribozymes (described in Haselhoff and Gerlach (1988) Nature 334:585-591)
  • ribozymes can be used to catalytically cleave 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA transcripts to thereby inhibit translation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA.
  • a ribozyme having specificity for a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding nucleic acid can be designed based upon the nucleotide sequence of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 cDNA disclosed herein (i.e., SEQ ID NO:l, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, or 29).
  • a derivative of a Tetrahymena L-19 INS R ⁇ A can be constructed in which the nucleotide sequence of the active site is complementary to the nucleotide sequence to be cleaved in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding mR ⁇ A (see, for example, Cech et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,987,071; and Cech et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,116,742).
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA can be used to select a catalytic RNA having a specific ribonuclease activity from a pool of RNA molecules (see, for example, Bartel, D. and Szostak, J.W. (1993) Science 261:1411-1418).
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression can also be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequences complementary to the regulatory region of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 (e.g., the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 promoter and/or enhancers) to form triple helical structures that prevent transcription of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene in target cells (see, for example, Helene, C
  • Antibodies that are both specific for the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein and interfere with its activity may also be used to modulate or inhibit 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein function.
  • Such antibodies may be generated using standard techniques described herein, against the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein itself or against peptides corresponding to portions of the protein.
  • Such antibodies include but are not limited to polyclonal, monoclonal, Fab fragments, single chain antibodies, or chimeric antibodies.
  • Lipofectin liposomes may be used to deliver the antibody or a fragment of the Fab region which binds to the target epitope into cells. Where fragments of the antibody are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment which binds to the target protein's binding domain is preferred.
  • peptides having an amino acid sequence corresponding to the domain of the variable region of the antibody that binds to the target gene protein may be used. Such peptides may be synthesized chemically or produced via recombinant DNA technology using methods well known in the art (described in, for example, Creighton (1983), supra; and Sambrook et al. (1989) supra).
  • Single chain neutralizing antibodies which bind to intracellular target gene epitopes may also be administered.
  • Such single chain antibodies may be administered, for example, by expressing nucleotide sequences encoding single- chain antibodies within the target cell population by utilizing, for example, techniques such as those described in Marasco et al. (1993) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 90:7889- 7893).
  • the target gene protein is extracellular, or is a transmembrane protein, such as the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • Antibodies that are specific for one or more extracellular domains of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, for example, and that interfere with its activity, are particularly useful in treating cardiovascular disease. Such antibodies are especially efficient because they can access the target domains directly from the bloodstream. Any of the administration techniques described below which are appropriate for peptide administration may be utilized to effectively administer inhibitory target gene antibodies to their site of action.
  • Genes that cause cardiovascular disease may be underexpressed within cardiovascular disease situations. Alternatively, the activity of the protein products of such genes may be decreased, leading to the development of cardiovascular disease symptoms. Such down-regulation of gene expression or decrease of protein activity might have a causative or exacerbating effect on the disease state.
  • genes that are up-regulated in the disease state might be exerting a protective effect.
  • a variety of techniques may be used to increase the expression, synthesis, or activity of genes and/or proteins that exert a protective effect in response to cardiovascular disease conditions.
  • Described in this section are methods whereby the level 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity may be increased to levels wherein cardiovascular disease symptoms are ameliorated.
  • the level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity may be increased, for example, by either increasing the level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression or by increasing the level of active 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein which is present.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein at a level sufficient to ameliorate cardiovascular disease symptoms may be administered to a patient exhibiting such symptoms. Any of the techniques discussed below may be used for such administration.
  • One of skill in the art will readily know how to determine the concentration of effective, non-toxic doses of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, utilizing techniques such as those described below.
  • RNA sequences encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein may be directly administered to a patient exhibiting cardiovascular disease symptoms, at a concentration sufficient to produce a level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein such that cardiovascular disease symptoms are ameliorated.
  • Any of the techniques discussed below, which achieve intracellular administration of compounds, such as, for example, liposome administration may be used for the administration of such RNA molecules.
  • the RNA molecules may be produced, for example, by recombinant techniques such as those described herein.
  • subjects may be treated by gene replacement therapy.
  • Cells preferably, autologous cells, containing 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414,
  • 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expressing gene sequences may then be introduced or reintroduced into the subject at positions which allow for the amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms.
  • Such cell replacement techniques may be preferred, for example, when the gene product is a secreted, extracellular gene product.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to methods for treating a subject suffering from a cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis. These methods involve administering to a subject an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587,
  • the method involves administering to a subject a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or nucleic acid molecule as therapy to compensate for reduced, aberrant, or unwanted 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity.
  • Stimulation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is desirable in situations in which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 is abnormally downregulated and/or in which increased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is likely to have a beneficial effect.
  • inhibition of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is desirable in situations in which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 is abnormally upregulated and/or in which decreased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is likely to have a beneficial effect, e.g., inhibition of atherosclerotic lesion formation.
  • compositions suitable for such administration typically comprise the agent (e.g., nucleic acid molecule, protein, or antibody) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • agent e.g., nucleic acid molecule, protein, or antibody
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration.
  • the use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • a pharmaceutical composition used in the therapeutic methods of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration.
  • routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral
  • Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide.
  • the parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
  • compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion.
  • suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor ELTM (BASF, Parsippany, NJ) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyetheylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like.
  • isotonic agents for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, and sodium chloride in the composition.
  • Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the agent that modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity (e.g., a fragment of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, .
  • dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition.
  • the tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
  • a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin
  • an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch
  • a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes
  • a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide
  • the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
  • Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means.
  • penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation.
  • penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives.
  • Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories.
  • the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.
  • agents that modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.
  • suppositories e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides
  • retention enemas for rectal delivery.
  • the agents that modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • a controlled release formulation including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
  • Liposomal suspensions can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,522,811. It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage.
  • Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the agent that modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an agent for the treatment of subjects.
  • Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such agents can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population).
  • the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50.
  • Agents which exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While agents that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such agents to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.
  • the data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
  • the dosage of such 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulating agents lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture.
  • IC50 i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms
  • levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of protein or polypeptide ranges from about 0.001 to 30 mg/kg body weight, preferably about 0.01 to 25 mg/kg body weight, more preferably about 0J to 20 mg/kg body weight, and even more preferably about 1 to 10 mg/kg, 2 to 9 mg/kg, 3 to 8 mg/kg, 4 to 7 mg/kg, or 5 to 6 mg/kg body weight.
  • an effective dosage ranges from about 0.001 to 30 mg/kg body weight, preferably about 0.01 to 25 mg/kg body weight, more preferably about 0J to 20 mg/kg body weight, and even more preferably about 1 to 10 mg/kg, 2 to 9 mg/kg, 3 to 8 mg/kg, 4 to 7 mg/kg, or 5 to 6 mg/kg body weight.
  • treatment of a subject with a therapeutically effective amount of a protein, polypeptide, or antibody can include a single treatment or, preferably, can include a series of treatments.
  • a subject is treated with antibody, protein, or polypeptide in the range of between about 0J to 20 mg/kg body weight, one time per week for between about 1 to 10 weeks, preferably between 2 to 8 weeks, more preferably between about 3 to 7 weeks, and even more preferably for about 4, 5, or 6 weeks.
  • the effective dosage of antibody, protein, or polypeptide used for treatment may increase or decrease over the course of a particular treatment. Changes in dosage may result and become apparent from the results of diagnostic assays as described herein.
  • the present invention encompasses agents which modulate expression or activity.
  • An agent may, for example, be a small molecule.
  • small molecules include, but are not limited to, peptides, peptidomimetics, amino acids, amino acid analogs, polynucleotides, polynucleotide analogs, nucleotides, nucleotide analogs, organic or inorganic compounds (i.e,.
  • heteroorganic and organometallic compounds having a molecular weight less than about 10,000 grams per mole, organic or inorganic compounds having a molecular weight less than about 5,000 grams per mole, organic or inorganic compounds having a molecular weight less than about 1,000 grams per mole, organic or inorganic compounds having a molecular weight less than about 500 grams per mole, and salts, esters, and other pharmaceutically acceptable forms of such compounds. It is understood that appropriate doses of small molecule agents depends upon a number of factors within the ken of the ordinarily skilled physician, veterinarian, or researcher.
  • the dose(s) of the small molecule will vary, for example, depending upon the identity, size, and condition of the subject or sample being treated, further depending upon the route by which the composition is to be administered, if applicable, and the effect which the practitioner desires the small molecule to have upon the nucleic acid or polypeptide of the invention.
  • Exemplary doses include milligram or microgram amounts of the small molecule per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g., about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 500 milligrams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 5 milligrams per kilogram, or about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 50 micrograms per kilogram). It is furthermore understood that appropriate doses of a small molecule depend upon the potency of the small molecule with respect to the expression or activity to be modulated. Such appropriate doses may be determined using the assays described herein.
  • a physician, veterinarian, or researcher may, for example, prescribe a relatively low dose at first, subsequently increasing the dose until an appropriate response is obtained.
  • the specific dose level for any particular animal subject will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, gender, and diet of the subject, the time of administration, the route of administration, the rate of excretion, any drug combination, and the degree of expression or activity to be modulated.
  • an antibody may be conjugated to a therapeutic moiety such as a cytotoxin, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion.
  • a cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells. Examples include taxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracin dione, mitoxantrone, lnithramycin, actinomycin D, 1-dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof.
  • Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepa chlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU), cyclothosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycin C, and cis-dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin), anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) and doxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents (e.g.
  • the drug moiety can be used for modifying a given biological response, the drug moiety is not to be construed as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents.
  • the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing a desired biological activity.
  • proteins may include, for example, a toxin such as abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin, or diphtheria toxin; a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, alpha- interferon, beta-interferon, nerve growth factor, platelet derived growth factor, tissue plasminogen activator; or biological response modifiers such as, for example, lymphokines, interleukin-1 ("IL-1"), interleuldn-2 (“IL-2”), interleukin-6 (“IL-6”), granulocyte macrophase colony stimulating factor (“GM-CSF”), granulocyte colony stimulating factor (“G-CSF”), or other growth factors.
  • IL-1 interleukin-1
  • IL-2 interleuldn-2
  • an antibody can be conjugated to a second antibody to form an antibody heteroconjugate as described by Segal in U.S. Patent No. 4,676,980.
  • the nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention can be inserted into vectors and used as gene therapy vectors.
  • Gene therapy vectors can be delivered to a subject by, for example, intravenous injection, local administration (see U.S. Patent 5,328,470) or by stereotactic injection (see, e.g., Chen et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91 :3054-3057).
  • the pharmaceutical preparation of the gene therapy vector can include the gene therapy vector in an acceptable diluent, or can comprise a slow release matrix in which the gene delivery vehicle is imbedded.
  • the pharmaceutical preparation can include one or more cells which produce the gene delivery system.
  • pharmacogenomics i.e., the study of the relationship between a subject's genotype and that subject's response to a foreign compound or drug
  • Differences in metabolism of therapeutics can lead to severe toxicity or therapeutic failure by altering the relation between dose and blood concentration of the pharmacologically active drug.
  • a physician or clinician may consider applying knowledge obtained in relevant pharmacogenomics studies in detemiining whether to administer an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, as well as tailoring the dosage and/or therapeutic regimen of treatment with an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • Pharmacogenomics deals with clinically significant hereditary variations in the response to drugs due to altered drug disposition and abnormal action in affected persons.
  • G6PD glucose-6-phosphate aminopeptidase deficiency
  • a genome-wide association relies primarily on a high-resolution map of the human genome consisting of already known gene-related markers (e.g., a "bi-allelic” gene marker map which consists of 60,000-100,000 polymorphic or variable sites on the human genome, each of which has two variants).
  • gene-related markers e.g., a "bi-allelic” gene marker map which consists of 60,000-100,000 polymorphic or variable sites on the human genome, each of which has two variants.
  • Such a high-resolution genetic map can be compared to a map of the genome of each of a statistically significant number of patients taking part in a Phase 11/111 drug trial to identify markers associated with a particular observed drug response or side effect.
  • such a high resolution map can be generated from a combination of some ten million known single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) in the human genome.
  • SNPs single nucleotide polymorphisms
  • a "SNP" is a common alteration that occurs in a single nucleotide base in a stretch of DNA. For example, a SNP may occur once per every 1000 bases of DNA.
  • a SNP may be involved in a disease process, however, the vast majority may not be disease-associated.
  • individuals Given a genetic map based on the occurrence of such SNPs, individuals can be grouped into genetic categories depending on a particular pattern of SNPs in their individual genome.
  • treatment regimens can be tailored to groups of genetically similar individuals, taldng into account traits that may be common among such genetically similar individuals.
  • a method termed the "candidate gene approach" can be utilized to identify genes that predict drug response.
  • a gene that encodes a drug target e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein used in the methods of the present invention
  • all common variants of that gene can be fairly easily identified in the population and it can be determined if having one version of the gene versus another is associated with a particular drug response.
  • the activity of drug metabolizing enzymes is a major determinant of both the intensity and duration of drug action.
  • drug metabolizing enzymes e.g., N-acetyltransferase 2 (NAT 2) and the cytochrome P450 enzymes CYP2D6 and CYP2C19
  • NAT 2 N-acetyltransferase 2
  • CYP2D6 and CYP2C19 cytochrome P450 enzymes
  • the gene coding for CYP2D6 is highly polymorphic and several mutations have been identified in PM, which all lead to the absence of functional CYP2D6. Poor metabolizers of CYP2D6 and CYP2C19 quite frequently experience exaggerated drug response and side effects when they receive standard doses. If a metabolite is the active therapeutic moiety, PM show no therapeutic response, as demonstrated for the analgesic effect of codeine mediated by its CYP2D6-formed metabolite morphine. The other extreme are the so called ultra-rapid metabolizers who do not respond to standard doses. Recently, the molecular basis of ultra-rapid metabolism has been identified to be due to CYP2D6 gene amplification.
  • a method termed the "gene expression profiling" can be utilized to identify genes that predict drug response.
  • a drug e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 molecule or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator used in the methods of the present invention) can give an indication whether gene pathways related to toxicity have been turned on.
  • Information generated from more than one of the above pharmacogenomics approaches can be used to determine appropriate dosage and treatment regimens for prophylactic or therapeutic treatment of a subject.
  • This knowledge when applied to dosing or drug selection, can avoid adverse reactions or therapeutic failure and, thus, enhance therapeutic or prophylactic efficiency when treating a subject suffering from a cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis, with an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • the methods of the invention include the use of vectors, preferably expression vectors, containing a nucleic acid encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein (or a portion thereof).
  • vector refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting another nucleic acid to which it has been linked.
  • vectors refers to a circular double stranded D ⁇ A loop into which additional D ⁇ A segments can be ligated.
  • viral vector Another type of vector, wherein additional D ⁇ A segments can be ligated into the viral genome.
  • Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are introduced (e.g., bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian vectors). Other vectors (e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors) are integrated into the genome of a host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome.
  • certain vectors are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operatively linked.
  • expression vectors are referred to herein as "expression vectors".
  • expression vectors of utility in recombinant D ⁇ A techniques are often in the form of plasmids.
  • plasmid and vector can be used interchangeably as the plasmid is the most commonly used form of vector.
  • the invention is intended to include such other forms of expression vectors, such as viral vectors (e.g., replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses and adeno-associated viruses), which serve equivalent functions.
  • the recombinant expression vectors to be used in the methods of the invention comprise a nucleic acid of the invention in a form suitable for expression of the nucleic acid in a host cell, which means that the recombinant expression vectors include one or more regulatory sequences, selected on the basis of the host cells to be used for expression, which is operatively linked to the nucleic acid sequence to be expressed.
  • "operably linked" is intended to mean that the nucleotide sequence of interest is linked to the regulatory sequence(s) in a manner which allows for expression of the nucleotide sequence (e.g., in an in vitro transcription/translation system or in a host cell when the vector is introduced into the host cell).
  • regulatory sequence is intended to include promoters, enhancers and other expression control elements (e.g., polyadenylation signals). Such regulatory sequences are described, for example, in Goeddel (1990) Methods Enzymol. 185:3-7. Regulatory sequences include those which direct constitutive expression of a nucleotide sequence in many types of host cells and those which direct expression of the nucleotide sequence only in certain host cells (e.g., tissue-specific regulatory sequences). It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the design of the expression vector can depend on such factors as the choice of the host cell to be transformed, the level of expression of protein desired, and the like.
  • the expression vectors of the invention can be introduced into host cells to thereby produce proteins or peptides, including fusion proteins or peptides, encoded by nucleic acids as described herein (e.g., 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, mutant forms of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, fusion proteins, and the like).
  • nucleic acids e.g., 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, fusion proteins, and the like).
  • the recombinant expression vectors to be used in the methods of the invention can be designed for expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183,
  • 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins in prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells can be expressed in bacterial cells such as E. coli, insect cells (using baculovirus expression vectors), yeast cells, or mammalian cells. Suitable host cells are discussed further in Goeddel (1990) supra.
  • the recombinant expression vector can be transcribed and translated in vitro, for example using T7 promoter regulatory sequences and T7 polymerase.
  • Fusion vectors add a number of amino acids to a protein encoded therein, usually to the amino terminus of the recombinant protein.
  • Such fusion vectors typically serve three purposes: 1) to increase expression of recombinant protein; 2) to increase the solubility of the recombinant protein; and 3) to aid in the purification of the recombinant protein by acting as a ligand in affinity purification.
  • a proteolytic cleavage site is introduced at the junction of the fusion moiety and the recombinant protein to enable separation of the recombinant protein from the fusion moiety subsequent to purification of the fusion protein.
  • enzymes, and their cognate recognition sequences include Factor Xa, thrombin and enterokinase.
  • Typical fusion expression vectors include pGEX (Pharmacia Biotech Inc; Smith, D.B. and Johnson, K.S.
  • GST glutathione S-transferase
  • Purified fusion proteins can be utilized in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity assays, (e.g., direct assays or competitive assays described in detail below), or to generate antibodies specific for 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins.
  • activity assays e.g., direct assays or competitive assays described in detail below
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein expressed in a retroviral expression vector of the present invention can be utilized to infect bone marrow cells which are subsequently transplanted into irradiated recipients. The pathology of the subject recipient is then examined after sufficient time has passed (e.g., six weeks).
  • a nucleic acid of the invention is expressed in mammalian cells using a mammalian expression vector.
  • mammalian expression vectors include pCDM8 (Seed, B. (1987) Nature 329:840) and pMT2PC (Kaufman et al. (1987) EMBO J. 6:187-195).
  • the expression vector's control functions are often provided by viral regulatory elements.
  • commonly used promoters are derived from polyoma, Adenovirus 2, cytornegalovirus and Simian Virus 40.
  • suitable expression systems for both prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells see chapters 16 and 17 of Sambrook, J.
  • the recombinant mammalian expression vector is capable of directing expression of the nucleic acid preferentially in a particular cell type (e.g., tissue-specific regulatory elements are used to express the nucleic acid).
  • the methods of the invention may further use a recombinant expression vector comprising a DNA molecule of the invention cloned into the expression vector in an antisense orientation. That is, the DNA molecule is operatively linked to a regulatory sequence in a manner which allows for expression (by transcription of the DNA molecule) of an RNA molecule which is antisense to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA.
  • the antisense expression vector can be in the form of a recombinant plasmid, phagemid, or attenuated virus in which antisense nucleic acids are produced under the control of a high efficiency regulatory region, the activity of which can be determined by the cell type into which the vector is introduced.
  • a high efficiency regulatory region the activity of which can be determined by the cell type into which the vector is introduced.
  • nucleic acid molecule of the invention is introduced, e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecule within a recombinant expression vector or a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecule containing sequences which allow it to homologously recombine into a specific site of the host cell's genome.
  • host cell and "recombinant host cell” are used interchangeably herein. It is understood that such terms refer not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny or potential progeny of such a cell. Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included within the scope of the term as used herein.
  • a host cell can be any prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be expressed in bacterial cells such as E. coli, insect cells, yeast or mammalian cells (such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO) or COS cells).
  • bacterial cells such as E. coli, insect cells, yeast or mammalian cells (such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO) or COS cells).
  • CHO Chinese hamster ovary cells
  • COS cells Chinese hamster ovary cells
  • Vector DNA can be introduced into prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells via conventional transformation or transfection techniques.
  • transformation and “transfection” are intended to refer to a variety of art-recognized techniques for introducing foreign nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) into a host cell, including calcium phosphate or calcium chloride co-precipitation, D ⁇ A ⁇ -dextran-mediated transfection, lipofection, or electroporation. Suitable methods for transforming or transfecting host cells can be found in Sambrook et al. (Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 1989), and other laboratory manuals.
  • a host cell used in the methods of the invention such as a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cell in culture, can be used to produce (i.e., express) a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • the invention further provides methods for producing a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein using the host cells of the invention.
  • the method comprises culturing the host cell of the invention (into which a recombinant expression vector encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein has been introduced) in a suitable medium such that a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein is produced.
  • the method further comprises isolating a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921 , 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein from the medium or the host cell.
  • the methods of the invention include the use of isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins or biologically active portions thereof, as well as nucleic acid fragments sufficient for use as hybridization probes to identify 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding nucleic acid molecules (e.g., 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA) and fragments for use as PCR primers for the amplification or mutation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680
  • nucleic acid molecule is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) and RNA molecules (e.g., mRNA) and analogs of the DNA or RNA generated using nucleotide analogs.
  • the nucleic acid molecule can be single- stranded or double-stranded, but preferably is double-stranded DNA.
  • a nucleic acid molecule used in the methods of the present invention e.g., a nucleic acid molecule having the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion thereof, can be isolated using standard molecular biology techniques and the sequence information provided herein.
  • nucleic acid molecules can be isolated using standard hybridization and cloning techniques (e.g., as described in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 1989).
  • nucleic acid molecule encompassing all or a portion of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29 can be isolated by the polymerase chain reaction ⁇ (PCR) using synthetic oligonucleotide primers designed based upon the sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29.
  • a nucleic acid used in the methods of the invention can be amplified using cDNA, mRNA or, alternatively, genomic DNA as a template and appropriate oligonucleotide primers according to standard PCR amplification techniques.
  • oligonucleotides corresponding to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleotide sequences can be prepared by standard synthetic techniques, e.g., using an automated DNA synthesizer.
  • the isolated nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention comprise the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, a complement of the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion of any of these nucleotide sequences.
  • a nucleic acid molecule which is complementary to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ JO 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, is one which is sufficiently complementary to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29 such that it can hybridize to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29 thereby forming a stable duplex.
  • an isolated nucleic acid molecule used in the methods of the present invention comprises a nucleotide sequence which is at least about 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to the entire length of the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion of any of this nucleotide sequence.
  • nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention can comprise only a portion of the nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, , for example, a fragment which can be used as a probe or primer or a fragment encoding a portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, e.g., a biologically active portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • the probe/primer typically comprises substantially purified oligonucleotide.
  • the oligonucleotide typically comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least about 12 or 15, preferably about 20 or 25, more preferably about 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, or 75 consecutive nucleotides of a sense sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, of an anti-sense sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or of a naturally occurring allelic variant or mutant of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, .
  • a nucleic acid molecule used in the methods of the present invention comprises a nucleotide sequence which is greater than 100, 100- 200, 200-300, 300-400, 400-500, 500-600, 600-700, 700-800, 800-900, 900-1000, 1000- 1100, 1100-1200, 1200-1300, or more nucleotides in length and hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions to a nucleic acid molecule of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, .
  • hybridizes under stringent conditions is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences that are significantly identical or homologous to each other remain hybridized to each other.
  • the conditions are such that sequences at least about 70%, more preferably at least about 80%, even more preferably at least about 85% or 90% identical to each other remain hybridized to each other.
  • stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Ausubel et al, eds., John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (1995), sections 2, 4 and 6.
  • stringent hybridization conditions includes hybridization in 4X sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC), at about 65-70°C (or hybridization in 4X SSC plus 50% formamide at about 42-50°C) followed by one or more washes in IX SSC, at about 65-70° C.
  • SSC sodium chloride/sodium citrate
  • a preferred, non-limiting example of highly stringent hybridization conditions includes hybridization in IX SSC, at about 65-70°C (or hybridization in IX SSC plus 50% formamide at about 42-50°C) followed by one or more washes in 0.3X SSC, at about 65- 70°C.
  • a preferred, non-limiting example of reduced stringency hybridization conditions includes hybridization in 4X SSC, at about 50-60°C (or alternatively hybridization in 6X SSC plus 50% formamide at about 40-45°C) followed by one or more washes in 2X SSC, at about 50-60°C. Ranges intermediate to the above-recited values, e.g., at 65-70°C or at 42-50°C are also intended to be encompassed by the present invention.
  • SSPE lxSSPE is 0.15M NaCl, lOmM NaH 2 PO 4 , and 1.25mM EDTA, pH 7.4
  • SSC lxSSC is 0J5M NaCl and 15mM sodium citrate
  • additional reagents may be added to hybridization and/or wash buffers to decrease non-specific hybridization of nucleic acid molecules to membranes, for example, nitrocellulose or nylon membranes, including but not limited to blocking agents (e.g., BSA or salmon or herring sperm carrier DNA), detergents (e.g., SDS), chelating agents (e.g., EDTA), Ficoll, PVP and the like.
  • blocking agents e.g., BSA or salmon or herring sperm carrier DNA
  • detergents e.g., SDS
  • chelating agents e.g., EDTA
  • Ficoll e.g., Ficoll, PVP and the like.
  • the probe further comprises a label group attached thereto, e.g., the label group can be a radioisotope, a fluorescent compound, an enzyme, or an enzyme co-factor.
  • Such probes can be used as a part of a diagnostic test ldt for identifying cells or tissue which misexpress a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, such as by measuring a level of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding nucleic acid in a sample of cells from a subject e.g., detecting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA levels or determining whether a genomic 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680,
  • the methods of the invention further encompass the use of nucleic acid molecules that differ from the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, due to degeneracy of the genetic code and thus encode the same 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins as those encoded by the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, .
  • an isolated nucleic acid molecule included in the methods of the invention has a nucleotide sequence encoding a protein having an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30.
  • the methods of the invention further include the use of allelic variants of human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 , e.g., functional and non-functional allelic variants.
  • Functional allelic variants are naturally occurring amino acid sequence variants of the human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein that maintain a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • Functional allelic variants will typically contain only conservative substitution of one or more amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, or substitution, deletion or insertion , of non-critical residues in non-critical regions of the protein.
  • Non-functional allelic variants are naturally occurring amino acid sequence variants of the human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein that do not have a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • Non-functional allelic variants will typically contain a non-conservative substitution, deletion, or insertion or premature truncation of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, or a substitution, insertion or deletion in critical residues or critical regions of the protein.
  • the methods of the present invention may further use non-human orthologues of the human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • Orthologues of the human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein are proteins that are isolated from non-human organisms and possess the same 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • the methods of the present invention further include the use of nucleic acid molecules comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion thereof, in which a mutation has been introduced.
  • the mutation may lead to amino acid substitutions at "non-essential” amino acid residues or at "essential” amino acid residues.
  • non-essential amino acid residue is a residue that can be altered from the wild-type sequence of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 (e.g., the sequence of SEQ ID NO:2) without altering the biological activity, whereas an "essential" amino acid residue is required for biological activity.
  • amino acid residues that are conserved among the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins of the present invention and other members of the family are not likely to be amenable to alteration.
  • Mutations can be introduced into SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis.
  • conservative amino acid substitutions are made at one or more predicted non-essential amino acid residues.
  • a "conservative amino acid substitution” is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art.
  • amino acids with basic side chains e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine
  • acidic side chains e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid
  • uncharged polar side chains e.g., asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine
  • nonpolar side chains e.g., glycine, alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan
  • beta-branched side chains e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine
  • aromatic side chains e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine
  • a predicted nonessential amino acid residue in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein is preferably replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family.
  • mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity. Following mutagenesis of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the protein can be determined using the assay described herein.
  • Another aspect of the invention pertains to the use of isolated nucleic acid molecules which are antisense to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, .
  • An "antisense" nucleic acid comprises a nucleotide sequence which is complementary to a "sense" nucleic acid encoding a protein, e.g., complementary to the coding strand of a double-stranded cDNA molecule or complementary to an mRNA sequence. Accordingly, an antisense nucleic acid can hydrogen bond to a sense nucleic acid.
  • the antisense nucleic acid can be complementary to an entire 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 coding strand, or to only a portion thereof.
  • an antisense nucleic acid molecule is antisense to a "coding region" of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequence encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • coding region refers to the region of the nucleotide sequence comprising codons which are translated into amino acid residues.
  • the antisense nucleic acid molecule is antisense to a "noncoding region" of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequence encoding 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • noncoding region refers to 5' and 3' sequences which flank the coding region that are not translated into amino acids (also referred to as 5' and 3' untranslated regions).
  • antisense nucleic acids of the invention can be designed according to the rules of Watson and Crick base pairing.
  • the antisense nucleic acid molecule can be complementary to the entire coding region of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA, but more preferably is an oligonucleotide which is antisense to only a portion of the coding or noncoding region of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA.
  • the antisense oligonucleotide can be complementary to the region surrounding the translation start site of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA.
  • An antisense oligonucleotide can be, for example, about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 or 50 nucleotides in length.
  • An antisense nucleic acid of the invention can be constructed using chemical synthesis and enzymatic ligation reactions using procedures known in the art.
  • an antisense nucleic acid e.g., an antisense oligonucleotide
  • an antisense nucleic acid can be chemically synthesized using naturally occurring nucleotides or variously modified nucleotides designed to increase the biological stability of the molecules or to increase the physical stability of the duplex formed between the antisense and sense nucleic acids, e.g., phosphorothioate derivatives and acridine substituted nucleotides can be used.
  • modified nucleotides which can be used to generate the antisense nucleic acid include 5- fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xantine, 4- acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2- thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D- galactosylqueosine, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1 -methyl guanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5- methylcytosine, N6-adenine, 7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5- methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta-D-mannosylqueosine, 5
  • the antisense nucleic acid can be produced biologically using an expression vector into which a nucleic acid has been subcloned in an antisense orientation (i.e., RNA transcribed from the inserted nucleic acid will be of an antisense orientation to a target nucleic acid of interest).
  • Antisense nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention are further described above, in section IV.
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the present invention can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety or phosphate backbone to improve, e.g., the stability, hybridization, or solubility of the molecule.
  • the deoxyribose phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid molecules can be modified to generate peptide nucleic acids (see Hyrup B. et al. (1996) Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 4 (1): 5-23).
  • peptide nucleic acids refer to nucleic acid mimics, e.g., DNA mimics, in which the deoxyribose phosphate backbone is replaced by a pseudopeptide backbone and only the four natural nucleobases are retained.
  • the neutral backbone of PNAs has been shown to allow for specific hybridization to DNA and RNA under conditions of low ionic strength.
  • the synthesis of PNA oligomers can be performed using standard solid phase peptide synthesis protocols as described in Hyrup B. et al. (1996) supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al. (1996) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 93:14670-675.
  • 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules can be used in the therapeutic and diagnostic applications described herein.
  • PNAs can be used as antisense or antigene agents for sequence-specific modulation of gene expression by, for example, inducing transcription or translation arrest or inhibiting replication.
  • PNAs of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules can also be used in the analysis of single base pair mutations in a gene, (e.g., by PNA-directed PCR clamping); as 'artificial restriction enzymes' when used in combination with other enzymes, (e.g., SI nucleases (Hyrup B. et al (1996) supra)); or as probes or primers for DNA sequencing or hybridization (Hyrup B. et al. (1996) supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al (1996) supra).
  • PNAs of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be modified, (e.g., to enhance their stability or cellular uptake), by attaching lipophilic or other helper groups to PNA, by the formation of PNA-DNA chimeras, or by the use of liposomes or other techniques of drug delivery known in the art.
  • PNA-DNA chimeras of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules can be generated which may combine the advantageous properties of PNA and DNA.
  • Such chimeras allow DNA recognition enzymes, (e.g., RNAse H and DNA polymerases), to interact with the DNA portion while the PNA portion would provide high binding affinity and specificity.
  • PNA-DNA chimeras can be linked using linkers of appropriate lengths selected in terms of base stacking, number of bonds between the nucleobases, and orientation (Hyrup B. et al. (1996) supra).
  • a DNA chain can be synthesized on a solid support using standard phosphoramidite coupling chemistry and modified nucleoside analogs, e.g., 5 '-(4-methoxytrityl)amino-5'-deoxy-thymidine phosphoramidite, can be used as a between the PNA and the 5' end of DNA (Mag, M. et al. (1989) Nucleic Acid Res. 17: 5973-88).
  • PNA monomers are then coupled in a stepwise manner to produce a chimeric molecule with a 5' PNA segment and a 3' DNA segment (Finn P.J. et al. (1996) supra).
  • chimeric molecules can be synthesized with a 5' DNA segment and a 3' PNA segment (Peterser, K.H. et al (1975) Bioorganic Med. Chem. Lett. 5: 1119-11124).
  • the oligonucleotide used in the methods of the invention may include other appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:648-652; PCT Publication No. W088/09810) or the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. W089/10134).
  • peptides e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo
  • agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane see, e.g., Letsinger et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al. (1987) Pro
  • oligonucleotides can be modified with hybridization-triggered cleavage agents (See, e.g., Krol et al. (1988) Bio-Techniques 6:958-976) or intercalating agents. (See, e.g., Zon (1988) Pharm. Res. 5:539-549).
  • the oligonucleotide may be conjugated to another molecule, (e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, or hybridization-triggered cleavage agent).
  • the methods of the invention include the use of isolated 139, 258, 1261, 1486,
  • native 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins can be isolated from cells or tissue sources by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques.
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins are produced by recombinant DNA techniques.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or polypeptide can be synthesized chemically using standard peptide synthesis techniques.
  • a "biologically active portion" of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein includes a fragment of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein having a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • Biologically active portions of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein include peptides comprising amino acid sequences sufficiently identical to or derived from the amino acid sequence of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, e.g., the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2, which include fewer amino acids than the full length 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, and exhibit at least one activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 3224
  • biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein (e.g., the N-terminal region of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein that is believed to be involved in the regulation of apoptotic activity).
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein that is believed to be involved in the regulation of apoptotic activity.
  • a biologically active portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be a polypeptide which is, for example, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300 or more amino acids in length.
  • Biologically active portions of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be used as targets for developing agents which modulate a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein used in the methods of the invention has an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, and retains the functional activity of the protein of SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, yet differs in amino acid sequence due to natural allelic variation or mutagenesis, as described in detail in subsection V above.
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein used in the methods of the invention is a protein which comprises an amino acid sequence at least about 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:2.
  • sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in one or both of a first and a second amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment and non-identical sequences can be disregarded for comparison purposes).
  • the length of a reference sequence aligned for comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, or 90% of the length of the reference sequence (e.g., when aligning a second sequence to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 having 500 amino acid residues, at least 75, preferably at least 150, more preferably at least 225, even more preferably at least 300, and even more preferably at least 400 or more amino acid residues are aligned).
  • amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared.
  • a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are identical at that position (as used herein amino acid or nucleic acid "identity” is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid "homology”).
  • the percent identity between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences, taking into account the number of gaps, and the length of each gap, which need to be introduced for optimal alignment of the two sequences.
  • the comparison of sequences and determination of percent identity between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm.
  • the percent identity between two amino acid sequences is determined using the Needleman and Wunsch (/. Mol. Biol. 48:444-453 (1970)) algorithm which has been incorporated into the GAP program in the GCG software package (available at http://www.gcg.com), using either a Blosum 62 matrix or a PAM250 matrix, and a gap weight of 16, 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, or 4 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
  • the percent identity between two nucleotide sequences is determined using the GAP program in the GCG software package (available at http://www.gcg.com), using a NWSgapdna.CMP matrix and a gap weight of 40, 50, 60, 70, or 80 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
  • the percent identity between two amino acid or nucleotide sequences is determined using the algorithm of E. Meyers and W. Miller (Comput. Appl. Biosci. 4:11-17 (1988)) which has been incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0 or 2.0U), using a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12 and a gap penalty of 4.
  • the methods of the invention may also use 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 chimeric or fusion proteins.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 "chimeric protein" or "fusion protein” comprises a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide operatively linked to a non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide.
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide refers to a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence corresponding to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 molecule, whereas a "non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide” refers to a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence corresponding to a protein which is not substantially homologous to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein,
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide can correspond to all or a portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein comprises at least one biologically active portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein comprises at least two biologically active portions of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • the term "operatively linked" is intended to indicate that the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide and the non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide are fused in-frame to each other.
  • the non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide can be fused to the N-terminus or C-terminus of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide.
  • the fusion protein is a GST-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein in which the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences.
  • Such fusion proteins can facilitate the purification of recombinant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • this fusion protein is a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein containing a heterologous signal sequence at its N-terminus.
  • expression and/or secretion of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be increased through use of a heterologous signal sequence.
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion proteins used in the methods of the invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a subject in vivo.
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion proteins can be used to affect the bioavailability of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate.
  • 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion proteins may be useful therapeutically for the treatment of disorders caused by, for example, (i) aberrant modification or mutation of a gene encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein; (ii) mis-regulation of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene; and (iii) aberrant post-translational modification of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804
  • the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -fusion proteins used in the methods of the invention can be used as immunogens to produce anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies in a subject, to purify 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ligands and in screening assays to identify molecules which inhibit the interaction of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398,
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 chimeric or fusion protein used in the methods of the invention is produced by standard recombinant DNA techniques.
  • DNA fragments coding for the different polypeptide sequences are ligated together in-frame in accordance with conventional techniques, for example by employing blunt-ended or stagger-ended termini for ligation, restriction enzyme digestion to provide for appropriate termini, filling-in of cohesive ends as appropriate, alkaline phosphatase treatment to avoid undesirable joining, and enzymatic ligation.
  • the fusion gene can be synthesized by conventional techniques including automated DNA synthesizers.
  • PCR amplification of gene fragments can be carried out using anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and reamplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence (see, for example, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, eds. Ausubel et al. John Wiley & Sons: 1992).
  • many expression vectors are commercially available that already encode a fusion moiety (e.g., a GST polypeptide).
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 - encoding nucleic acid can be cloned into such an expression vector such that the fusion moiety is linked in-frame to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • the present invention also pertains to the use of variants of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins which function as either 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 agonists (mimetics) or as 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antagonists.
  • Variants of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins can be generated by mutagenesis, e.g., discrete point mutation or truncation of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • 93804 proteins can retain substantially the same, or a subset, of the biological activities of the naturally occurring form of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • An antagonist of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can inhibit one or more of the activities of the naturally occurring form of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein by, for example, competitively modulating a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -mediated activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • treatment of a subject with a variant having a subset of the biological activities of the naturally occurring form of the protein has fewer side effects in a subject relative to treatment with the naturally occurring form of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • variants of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein which function as either 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 agonists (mimetics) or as 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antagonists can be identified by screening combinatorial libraries of mutants, e.g., truncation mutants, of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein for 139, 258, 1261, 14
  • a variegated library of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 variants is generated by combinatorial mutagenesis at the nucleic acid level and is encoded by a variegated gene library.
  • a variegated library of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 variants can be produced by, for example, enzymatically ligating a mixture of synthetic oligonucleotides into gene sequences such that a degenerate set of potential 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences is expressible as individual polypeptides, or alternatively, as a set of larger fusion proteins (e.g., for phage display) containing the set of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences therein.
  • degenerate set of genes allows for the provision, in one mixture, of all of the sequences encoding the desired set of potential 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences.
  • Methods for synthesizing degenerate oligonucleotides are known in the art (see, e.g., Narang, S.A. (1983) Tetrahedron 39:3; Itakura et al (1984) Annu. Rev. Biochem. 53:323; Itakura et al. (1984) Science 198:1056; Ike et ⁇ Z. (1983) Nucleic Acid Res. 11:477).
  • libraries of fragments of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein coding sequence can be used to generate a variegated population of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fragments for screening and subsequent selection of variants of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • a library of coding sequence fragments can be generated by treating a double stranded PCR fragment of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 coding sequence with a nuclease under conditions wherein nicldng occurs only about once per molecule, denaturing the double stranded DNA, renaturing the DNA to form double stranded DNA which can include sense/antisense pairs from different nicked products, removing single stranded portions from reformed duplexes by treatment with SI nuclease, and ligating the resulting fragment library into an expression vector.
  • an expression library can be derived which encodes N- terminal, C-terminal and internal fragments of various sizes of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • Several techniques are known in the art for screening gene products of combinatorial libraries made by point mutations or truncation, and for screening cDNA libraries for gene products having a selected property.
  • Such techniques are adaptable for rapid screening of the gene libraries generated by the combinatorial mutagenesis of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins.
  • the most widely used techniques, which are amenable to high through- put analysis, for screening large gene libraries typically include cloning the gene library into replicable expression vectors, transforming appropriate cells with the resulting library of vectors, and expressing the combinatorial genes under conditions in which detection of a desired activity facilitates isolation of the vector encoding the gene whose product was detected.
  • Recursive ensemble mutagenesis (REM), a new technique which enhances the frequency of functional mutants in the libraries, can be used in combination with the screening assays to identify 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 variants (Arkin and Yourvan (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:7811-7815; Delgrave et al. (1993) Protein Engineering 6(3):327-331).
  • REM Recursive ensemble mutagenesis
  • the methods of the present invention further include the use of anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies.
  • An isolated 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, or a portion or fragment thereof can be used as an immunogen to generate antibodies that bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 using standard techniques for polyclonal and monoclonal antibody preparation.
  • a full-length 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be used or, alternatively, antigenic peptide fragments of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be used as immunogens.
  • the antigenic peptide of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 comprises at least 8 amino acid residues of the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30 and encompasses an epitope of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 such that an antibody raised against the peptide forms a specific immune complex with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • the antigenic peptide comprises at least 10 amino acid residues, more preferably at least 15 amino acid residues, even more preferably at least 20 amino acid residues, and most preferably at least 30 amino acid residues.
  • Preferred epitopes encompassed by the antigenic peptide are regions of 139, 258,
  • a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 immunogen is typically used to prepare antibodies by immunizing a suitable subject, (e.g., rabbit, goat, mouse, or other mammal) with the immunogen.
  • a suitable subject e.g., rabbit, goat, mouse, or other mammal
  • An appropriate immunogenic preparation can contain, for example, recombinantly expressed 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or a chemically synthesized 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide.
  • the preparation can further include an adjuvant, such as Freund's complete or incomplete adjuvant, or similar immunostimulatory agent.
  • Immunization of a suitable subject with an immunogenic 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 preparation induces a polyclonal anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody response.
  • antibody refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site which specifically binds (immunoreacts with) an antigen, such as a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • an antigen such as a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules include F(ab) and F(ab') 2 fragments which can be generated by treating the antibody with an enzyme such as pepsin.
  • the invention provides polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies that bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 molecules.
  • the term "monoclonal antibody” or “monoclonal antibody composition”, as used herein, refers to a population of antibody molecules that contain only one species of an antigen binding site capable of immunoreacting with a particular epitope of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • a monoclonal antibody composition thus typically displays a single binding affinity for a particular 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein with which it immunoreacts.
  • Polyclonal anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies can be prepared as described above by immunizing a suitable subject with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 immunogen.
  • the anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody titer in the immunized subject can be monitored over time by standard techniques, such as with an enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) using immobilized 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • ELISA enzyme linked immunosorbent assay
  • the antibody molecules directed against 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be isolated from the mammal (e.g., from the blood) and further purified by well known techniques, such as protein A chromatography to obtain the IgG fraction.
  • antibody-producing cells can be obtained from the subject and used to prepare monoclonal antibodies by standard techniques, such as the hybridoma technique originally described by Kohler and Milstein (1975) Nature 256:495-497) (see also, Brown et al.
  • an immortal cell line (typically a myeloma) is fused to lymphocytes (typically splenocytes) from a mammal immunized with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 immunogen as described above, and the culture supernatants of the resulting hybridoma cells are screened to identify a hybridoma producing a monoclonal antibody that binds 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • any of the many well known protocols used for fusing lymphocytes and immortalized cell lines can be applied for the purpose of generating an anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 monoclonal antibody (see, e.g., G. Galfre et al. (1977) Nature 266:55052; Gefter et al. (1977) supra; Lerner (1981) supra; and Kenneth (1980) supra). Moreover, the ordinarily skilled worker will appreciate that there are many variations of such methods which also would be useful.
  • the immortal cell line (e.g., a myeloma cell line) is derived from the same mammalian species as the lymphocytes.
  • murine hybridomas can be made by fusing lymphocytes from a mouse immunized with an immunogenic preparation of the present invention with an immortalized mouse cell line.
  • Preferred immortal cell lines are mouse myeloma cell lines that are sensitive to culture medium containing hypoxanthine, aminopterin and thymidine ("HAT medium").
  • myeloma cell lines can be used as a fusion partner according to standard techniques, e.g., the P3-NSl/l-Ag4-l, P3-x63-Ag8.653 or Sp2/O-Agl4 myeloma lines. These myeloma lines are available from ATCC. Typically, HAT-sensitive mouse myeloma cells are fused to mouse splenocytes using polyethylene glycol ("PEG"). Hybridoma cells resulting from the fusion are then selected using HAT medium, which kills unfused and unproductively fused myeloma cells (unfused splenocytes die after several days because they are not transformed).
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • Hybridoma cells producing a monoclonal antibody of the invention are detected by screening the hybridoma culture supernatants for antibodies that bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 , e.g., using a standard ELISA assay.
  • a monoclonal anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody can be identified and isolated by screening a recombinant combinatorial immunoglobulin library (e.g., an antibody phage display library) with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 to thereby isolate immunoglobulin library members that bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
  • a recombinant combinatorial immunoglobulin library e.g., an antibody phage display library
  • Kits for generating and screening phage display libraries are commercially available (e.g., the Pharmacia Recombinant Phage Antibody System, Catalog No. 27-9400-01 ; and the Stratagene SurfZAPTM Phage Display Kit, Catalog No. 240612). Additionally, examples of methods and reagents particularly amenable for use in generating and screening antibody display library can be found in, for example, Ladner et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,223,409; Kang et al. PCT International Publication No. WO 92/18619; Dower et al. PCT International Publication No. WO 91/17271; Winter et al. PCT International Publication WO 92/20791; Markland et al.
  • chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies such as chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies, comprising both human and non-human portions, which can be made using standard recombinant DNA techniques, are within the scope of the methods of the invention.
  • Such chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies can be produced by recombinant DNA techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in Robinson et al. International Application No. PCT/US 86/02269; Aldra, et al. European Patent Application 184,187; Taniguchi, M., European Patent Application 171,496; Morrison et al. European Patent Application 173,494; Neuberger et al. PCT International Publication No.
  • An anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody can be used to detect 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein (e.g., in a cellular lysate or cell supernatant) in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
  • Anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies can be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissue as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g., to, for example, determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials.
  • suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, ⁇ - galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase;
  • suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin;
  • suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin;
  • an example of a luminescent material includes luminol;
  • bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and examples of suitable radioactive material include
  • the TaqmanTM procedure is a quantitative, reverse transcription PCR-based approach for detecting mRNA.
  • the RT- PCR reaction exploits the 5' nuclease activity of AmpliTaq GoldTM DNA Polymerase to cleave a TaqManTM probe during PCR.
  • cDNA was generated from the samples of interest, e.g., heart, kidney, liver, skeletal muscle, and various vessels, and used as the starting material for PCR amplification.
  • a gene-specific oligonucleotide probe (complementary to the region being amplified) was included in the reaction (i.e., the TaqmanTM probe).
  • the TaqManTM probe includes the oligonucleotide with a fluorescent reporter dye covalently linked to the 5' end of the probe (such as FAM (6-carboxyfluorescein), TET (6-carboxy-4,7,2',7'-tetrachlorofluorescein), JOE (6-carboxy-4,5-dichloro-2,7-dimethoxyfluorescein), or VIC) and a quencher dye (TAMRA (6-carboxy-N,N,N' ,N' -tetramethylrhodamine) at the 3 ' end of the probe.
  • a fluorescent reporter dye covalently linked to the 5' end of the probe
  • TET 6-carboxy-4,7,2',7'-tetrachlorofluorescein
  • JOE 6-carboxy-4,5-dichloro-2,7-dimethoxyfluorescein
  • VIC a quencher dye
  • cleavage of the probe separates the reporter dye and the quencher dye, resulting in increased fluorescence of the reporter. Accumulation of PCR products is detected directly by monitoring the increase in fluorescence of the reporter dye. When the probe is intact, the proximity of the reporter dye to the quencher dye results in suppression of the reporter fluorescence.
  • the probe specifically anneals between the forward and reverse primer sites. The 5'-3' nucleolytic activity of the AmpliTaqTM Gold DNA Polymerase cleaves the probe between the reporter and the quencher only if the probe hybridizes to the target. The probe fragments are then displaced from the target, and polymerization of the strand continues.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to methods for the diagnosis and treatment of cardiovascular disease, including, but not limited to, atherosclerosis, reperfusion injury, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, thrombosis and endothelial cell disorders. Specifically, the present invention identifies the differential expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genes in cardiovascular disease states, relative to their expression in normal, or non-cardiovascular disease states, and/or in response to manipulations relevant to cardiovascular disease. The present invention describes methods for the diagnostic evaluation and prognosis of various cardiovascular diseases, and for the identification of subjects exhibiting a predisposition to such conditions. The invention also provides methods for identifying a compound capable of modulating cardiovascular disease. The present invention also provides methods for the identification and therapeutic use of compounds as treatments of cardiovascular disease.

Description

METHODS AND COMPOSITIONS TO TREAT CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASE USING 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921,
32248, 60489 OR 93804
This application claims priority to U.S. provisional application number 60/339,582, filed November 5, 2001, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
Cardiovascular disease is a major health risk throughout the industrialized world. Atherosclerosis, the most prevalent of cardiovascular diseases, is the principal cause of heart attack, stroke, and peripheral vascular disease resulting in significant disability and limb loss, and thereby the principle cause of death in the United States.
Atherosclerosis is a complex disease involving aspects of lipid metabolism and vascular inflammation. Both have significant effects on the initiation and progression of atherosclerosis. Irregular lipid metabolism is a very well established risk factor for atherosclerosis. Elevated low density lipoprotein (LDL), very low density lipoproteins (NLDL), triglycerides and low levels of high density lipoproteins (HDL) all independently contribute to atherosclerosis development and/or progression. There are a number of effective therapies currently being utilized in the clinic that result in lowering of these risk factors and, in turn decrease the rate of mortality and morbidity associated with atherosclerotic disease. Some of these therapies include the cholesterol lowering drugs statins, the triglyceride lowering drugs fibrates and niacin and the triglyceride lowering/HDL raising PPAR alpha activators. There is a need to identify new targets for atherosclerosis therapy. There have been significant advances made in understanding the role that inflammation plays in the process of atherosclerosis. Atherosclerosis involves many cell types and molecular factors (described in, for example, Ross (1993) Nature 362: 801-809). The process, in normal circumstances a protective response to insults to the endothelium and smooth muscle cells (SMCs) of the wall of the artery, consists of the formation of fibrofatty and fibrous lesions or plaques, preceded and accompanied by inflammation. The advanced lesions of atherosclerosis may occlude the artery concerned, and result from an excessive inflammatory-fibroproliferative response to numerous different forms of insult. Injury or dysfunction of the vascular endothelium is a common feature of many conditions that predispose an individual to accelerated development of atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease. There has been considerable effort in establishing that hypertension contributes to atherosclerosis. The identification of molecules that regulate blood pressure and vascular tone will be useful in discovering new therapies to treat cardiovascular diseases such as atherosclerosis. The present invention provides methods and compositions for the diagnosis and treatment of cardiovascular disease. As used herein, disorders involving the heart, or "cardiovascular disease" or a "cardiovascular disorder" include a disease or disorder which affects the cardiovascular system, e.g., the heart, the blood vessels, and/or the blood. A cardiovascular disorder can be caused by an imbalance in arterial pressure, a malfunction of the heart, or an occlusion of a blood vessel, e.g., by a thrombus. A cardiovascular disorder includes, but is not limited to disorders such as arteriosclerosis, atherosclerosis, cardiac hypertrophy, ischemia reperfusion injury, restenosis, arterial inflammation, vascular wall remodeling, ventricular remodeling, rapid ventricular pacing, coronary microembolism, tachycardia, bradycardia, pressure overload, aortic bending, coronary artery ligation, vascular heart disease, valvular disease, including but not limited to, valvular degeneration caused by calcification, rheumatic heart disease, endocarditis, or complications of artificial valves; atrial fibrillation, long-QT syndrome, congestive heart failure, sinus node dysfunction, angina, heart failure, hypertension, atrial fibrillation, atrial flutter, pericardial disease, including but not limited to, pericardial effusion and pericarditis; cardiomyopathies, e.g., dilated cardiomyopathy or idiopathic cardiomyopathy, myocardial infarction, coronary artery disease, coronary artery spasm, ischemic disease, arrhythmia, sudden cardiac death, and cardiovascular developmental disorders (e.g., arteriovenous malformations, arteriovenous fistulae, raynaud's syndrome, neurogenic thoracic outlet syndrome, causalgia/reflex sympathetic dystrophy, hemangioma, aneurysm, cavernous angioma, aortic valve stenosis, atrial septal defects, atrioventricular canal, coarctation of the aorta, ebsteins anomaly, hypoplastic left heart syndrome, interruption of the aortic arch, mitral valve prolapse, ductus arteriosus, patent foramen ovale, partial anomalous pulmonary venous return, pulmonary atresia with ventricular septal defect, pulmonary atresia without ventricular septal defect, persistance of the fetal circulation, pulmonary valve stenosis, single ventricle, total anomalous pulmonary venous return, transposition of the great vessels, tricuspid atresia, truncus arteriosus, ventricular septal defects). A cardiovascular disease or disorder also can include an endothelial cell disorder.
As used herein, an "endothelial cell disorder" includes a disorder characterized by aberrant, unregulated, or unwanted endothelial cell activity, e.g., proliferation, migration, angiogenesis, or vascularization; or aberrant expression of cell surface adhesion molecules or genes associated with angiogenesis, e.g., TBE-2, FLT and FLK. Endothelial cell disorders include tumorigenesis, tumor metastasis, psoriasis, diabetic retinopathy, endometriosis, Grave's disease, ischemic disease (e.g., atherosclerosis), and chronic inflammatory diseases (e.g., rheumatoid arthritis). A cardiovascular disease can also include thrombosis. Thrombosis can result from platelet dysfunction, e.g. seen in myocardial infarction, angina, hypertension, lipid disorders, diabetes mellitus; myelodysplastic syndromes; myeloproliferative yndromes (including polycythemia vera and thombocythemia); thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpuras; HIN-induced platelet disorders (ADDS-Thrombocytopenia); heparin induced thrombocytopenia; mural cell alterations/interactions leading to platelet aggregation/degranulation, vascular endothelial cell activation/injury, monocyte/macrophage extravasation and smooth muscle cell proliferation; autoimmune disorders such as, but not limited to vasculitis, antiphospholipid syndromes, systemic lupus erythromatosis; inflammatory diseases, such as, but not limited to ilmmune activation; graft Ns host disease; radiation induced hypercoagulation; clotting factor dysregulation either hereditary (autosomal dominant or recessive) such as, but not limited to clotting factor pathways including protein C/S, Anti-thrombin HI deficiency, and the Factor N Leiden mutation or acquired such as but not limited to autoimmune, cancer -associated and drug-induced dysregulation of clotting factors.
"Treatment", as used herein, is defined as the application or administration of a therapeutic agent to a patient, or application or administration of a therapeutic agent to an isolated tissue or cell line from a patient, who has a disease or disorder, a symptom of disease or disorder or a predisposition toward a disease or disorder, with the purpose of curing, healing, alleviating, relieving, altering, remedying, ameliorating, improving or affecting the disease or disorder, at least one symptom of disease or disorder or the predisposition toward a disease or disorder. A therapeutic agent includes, but is not limited to, small molecules, peptides, antibodies, ribozymes and antisense oligonucleotides. Representative molecules are described herein. The present invention is based, at least in part, on the discovery that nucleic acid and protein molecules, (described infra), are differentially expressed in cardiovascular disease states relative to their expression in normal, or non-cardiovascular disease states. The modulators of the molecules of the present invention, identified according to the methods of the invention can be used to modulate (e.g., inhibit, treat, or prevent) or diagnose cardiovascular disease, including, but not limited to, atherosclerosis and thrombosis.
"Differential expression", as used herein, includes both quantitative as well as qualitative differences in the temporal and/or tissue expression pattern of a gene. Thus, a differentially expressed gene may have its expression activated or inactivated in normal versus cardiovascular disease conditions (for example, in an experimental cardiovascular disease system such as in an animal model for atherosclerosis). The degree to which expression differs in normal versus cardiovascular disease or control versus experimental states need only be large enough to be visualized via standard characterization techniques, e.g., quantitative PCR, Northern analysis, subtractive hybridization. The expression pattern of a differentially expressed gene may be used as part of a prognostic or diagnostic cardiovascular disease, e.g., artherosclerosis and/or thrombosis, evaluation, or may be used in methods for identifying compounds useful for the treatment of cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis. In addition, a differentially expressed gene involved in cardiovascular disease may represent a target gene such that modulation of the level of target gene expression or of target gene product activity will act to cure, heal, alleviate, relieve, alter, remedy, ameliorate, improve or affect a cardiovascular disease condition, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis. Compounds that modulate target gene expression or activity of the target gene product can be used in the treatment of cardiovascular disease. Although the genes described herein may be differentially expressed with respect to cardiovascular disease, and/or their products may interact with gene products important to cardiovascular disease, the genes may also be involved in mechanisms important to additional cardiovascular cell processes.
Gene ID 139
The human 139 sequence (SEQ ID NO:l), (Gl: 181948, known also as endothelial differentiation protein (EDG-1)) which is approximately 2757 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1143 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 381 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:2) (Gl: 181949).
As determined by TaqMan analysis, expression of 139 mRNA was seen in human liver, skin, tonsil, spleen, bone marrow and peripheral blood cells. When marmosets are treated with the statin cerivastatin, expression of 139 mRNA was reduced compared to a placebo. Statins are used clinically for the reduction of cholesterol, a defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by statins in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. Therefore, 139 is predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of cerivastatin in lower cholesterol and triglyceride levels and is useful in the treatment of cardiovascular disease.
Gene ID 258 The human 258 sequence (SEQ TD NO:3), (Gl: 466488), known also as arginine vasopressin receptor (ANPR1)) which is approximately 1492 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1254 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 418 amino acid protein (SEQ ID ΝO:4) (GL667068). A determined by TaqMan analysis, expression of 258 mRNA was most abundant in normal human liver with moderate expression in breast and skin decubitus, with lower amounts seen in normal skin, skeletal muscle, adipose tissue and heart. 258 mRNA was repressed in the livers of monkeys fed a high cholesterol diet. Cholesterol is a well- established risk factor for the development and progression of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by cholesterol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for disease progression and or initiation and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. Therefore, antagonists of 258 are predicted to lower cholesterol and triglyceride levels.
Gene ID 1261
The human 1261 sequence (SEQ ID NO:5), (G 1813881, known also as NAK-1) which is approximately 2481 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1794 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 598 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:6) (GI: 1813882).
As determined by TaqMan analysis, expression of human 1261 mRNA was upregulated in human microvascular endothelial cells (FfMNEC) from the heart when they were treated with the pro-angiogenic factors vascular endothelial growth factor (NEGF), tumor necrosis factor alpha (TΝF-alpha) and interleukin 1 beta (EL-lbeta). 1261 mRΝA was also upregulated when HMNEC cells were treated with serum. These data indicate that 1261 mRΝA is upregulated when exposed to pro-angiogenic factors which indicates that it plays a role in angiogenesis. When human umbilical vein endothelial cells were subjected to laminar flow sheer stress (a condition known to promote the formation of atherosclerosis) 1261 mRNA was increased compared to cells not exposed to sheer stress.
Gene ID 1486 The human 1486 sequence (SEQ ID NO:7), (G 791187, known also as JNK activating kinase (JNKK1)) which is approximately 1310 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1197 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 399 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:8) (GL791188).. As determined by taqMan analysis, expression of 1486 mRNA was found to be high in human liver as compared to other normal tissues tested. Furthermore, 1486 mRNA was repressed in livers of marmosets when they were treated with probucol or a combination of cerivastatin and fenofibrate. Probucol is used clinically for the treatment of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by probucol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
Repression of 1486 is predicted to lower cholesterol and triglyceride levels and is thus useful in treating cardiovascular disease.
Gene ID 2398
The human 2398 sequence (SEQ ID NO:9), (GL7363341, lαiown also as C-C chemokine receptor type 11 (CC CKR-11)) which is approximately 1113 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1050 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 350 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO: 10) (G 7363342).
As determined by TaqMan analysis, expression of 2398 mRNA is down-regulated in endothelial cells (ECs) by shear stress, correlating with its anti-atherogenic or anti- proliferative effects. The laminar shear stress (LSS) paradigm is designed to simulate blood flow in a straight unbranched stretch of artery (treatment is 10 dyn/cm2 LSS for 24h). In vitro, it is known to increase nitric oxide production, decrease adhesion molecule expression and proliferation, and protect cells from the normal apoptotic response to serum withdrawal. Because of these effects in vitro, the paradigm is thought to reproduce the athero-protected (relatively lesion-free) state that is observed in straight, unbranched arteries experiencing laminar shear stress in vivo.
2398 is upregulated in ECs by hypoxic conditions at 24h. NEGF is upregulated at 6h. Given that 2398 is also upregulated by NEGF, its induction by hypoxia may be downstream of NEGF. Modulators of 2398 expression would be useful in treating cardiovascular disorders including but not limited to atherosclerosis.
Gene ID 2414
The human 2414 sequence (SEQ ID ΝO:ll), (G 1457938, known also as GPR68)) which is approximately 1697 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1095 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 365 amino acid protein (SEQ ID
NO: 12) Gl: 1457939).
As assessed by TaqMan analysis, expression of 2414 mRNA is up-regulated during the monocyte/macrophage lipid-loading process. Monocyte/macrophages that are stimulated with modified LDL mimics foam cell formation. Foam cells are the initiating event of atherogenesis, thus the genes that are up-regulated in this process have utility in identifying compounds useful in treating atherogenesis.
As assessed by TaqMan analysis, expression of 2414 mRNA is up-regulated during various cytokine stimulations in endothelial cells and monoctye/macrophages. CD40L,
TNFalpha, IL-1, and IFNgamma were used to stimulate either endothelial cells or monocyte/macrophages. These cytokines initiate/sustain the atherosclerotic pathogenesis. Expression of 2414 mRNA is up-regulated in monkey atheroma samples compared to normal vessels. This was observed both quantitatively by TaqMan analysis and qualitatively by in situ hybridization. Six different monkey atheroma samples were compared with normal vessel for quantitative comparison of 2414 expression.
Consistantly, there was increased expression of 2414 mRNA in atheromas as compared to normal vessels. 2414 shows up-regulation during many in vivo and in vitro paradigms that mimic atherogenesis. Therefore, 2414 blockade will lower the lesion formation in atherosclerotic vessels thereby attenuating the progression of atherogenesis.
Gene ID 7660
The human 7660 sequence (SEQ ID NO: 13), (G 2213808), known also as JA61)) which is approximately 1181 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1152 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 384 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:14) GI:2213809).
As assessed by TaqMan analysis, expression of 7660 mRNA is restricted to normal human liver. In addition, 7660 mRNA was reduced in marmoset liver which had been treated with cerivastatin. Statins are used clinically for the reduction of cholesterol, a defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by statins in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
Regulation of 7660 is predicted to reduce total cholesterol and have beneficial effects against atherosclerosis and hyperlipidemias.
Gene ID 8587
The human 8587 sequence (SEQ ID NO: 15), (GI:410213, known also as sodium/bile acid cotransporter) which is approximately 1580 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1047 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 349 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO: 16) (GL410214).
As assessed by TaqMan analysis, expression of 8587 mRNA is high in human liver. In addition 8587 mRNA is upregulated by cholestyramine in vivo in marmoset liver model and by combination statin/fibrate therapy in vivo in marmoset liver model. Cholestyramine is used clinically for the reduction of cholesterol, a defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by cholestyramine in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factors for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders.
Repression of 8587 is predicted to reduce total cholesterol and triglycerides and therefore has a role in cholesterol metabolism.
Gene ID 10183
The human 10183 sequence (SEQ ID NO:17), (Gl: 189328, known also as ornithine aminotransferase) which is approximately 2013 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1317 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 439 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:18) (GL189329).
As assessed by TaqMan analysis, 10183 mRNA is repressed by probucol and cerivastatin/fenofibrate in in vivo marmoset models. Probucol is used clinically for the treatment of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by probucol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. 10183 mRNA is also down-regulated by statin and PPAR agonists in vitro in primary human hepatocytes. PPAR alpha agonists are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well- defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. High expression of 10183 mRNA was seen in human liver. Repression of 10183 polynucleotides or polypeptides is predicted to reduce total cholesterol and triglyceride levels and thus is useful in treating cardiovascular disease.
Gene ID 10550 The human 10550 sequence (SEQ ID NO: 19), (G 9409793, known also as succinyl-CoA-synthetase) which is approximately 1227 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 999 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 333 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:20) (G 9409794). As assessed by TaqMan analysis, 10550 mRNA is repressed by probucol and cerivastatin/fenofibrate in in vivo marmoset models. Probucol is used clinically for the treatment of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by probucol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. High expression was also seen in human liver.
Repression of 10550 synthetase predicted to reduce total cholesterol and triglycerides.
Gene ID 12680
The human 12680 sequence (SEQ ID NO:21), (G 3006201, known also as prostaglandin transporter (PT)) which is approximately 4040 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1929 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 643 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:22)(GI: 1617590).
As assessed by TaqMan analysis, 12680 mRNA is repressed by probucol and cerivastatin/fenofibrate in in vivo marmoset models. Probucol is used clinically for the treatment of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by probucol in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. High expression was also seen in human liver.
Repression of 12680 synthetase predicted to reduce total cholesterol and triglycerides.
Gene ID 17921
The human 17921 sequence (SEQ ID NO:23) which is approximately 4897 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1518 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 506 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:24). (Partial sequence of 4312 nucleotides, known also as KIAA1382 is disclosed as G 7243144).
The rat ortholog of 17921 has been functionally characterized and shown to increase net levels of amino acids inside cells. It transports alanine with highest affinity, and also transports glutamine. Intracellular glutamine can inhibit the activity of endothelial nitric oxide synthase (eNOS).
Amino acid transporter 17921 is most highly expressed in endothelial cells, and is also highly expressed in vascular smooth muscle. In endothelial cells, expression of
17921 is strongly and consistently upregulated by laminar shear stress. 17921 is highly expressed in all human vessels examined .
Given the high expression level of 17921 in endothelial cells, the net transfer of glutamine may be quite significant, and may result in reduced nitric oxide production.
This would have consequences relevant to angiogenesis, atherosclerosis, and vascular tone.
Nitric oxide is a major vasodilator. Mice lacking eNOS have elevated blood pressure, increased succeptibility to atherosclerosis, and insufficient angiogenesis. Amino acid transporter 17921 may modulate the ability of endothelial cells to undergo angiogenesis by the additional mechanism of contributing to the amino acid pool available for protein synthesis. Gene ID 32248
The human 32248 sequence (SEQ ID NO:25), (GL8439650, known also as acetyl - CoA synthetase) which is approximately 2106 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 2103 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 701 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:26) (G 8439651).
As assessed by TaqMan analysis, 32248 mRNA was repressed by n-3 polyunsaturated fatty acid in monkey liver model. Dietary polyunsaturated fatty acid has been shown to protect against the development of atherosclerosis /coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by polyunsaturated fatty acids in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. 32248 mRNA was up-regulated in liver by cholestyramine and the combination statin/fibrate therapy in marmoset liver model. Cholestyramine is used clinically for the reduction of cholesterol, a defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by cholestyramine in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of this agent and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. Fibrates are used clinically for the reduction of triglycerides and statins for the reduction of cholesterol, both well-defined risk factor for atherosclerosis/coronary artery disease. Genes that are regulated by this combination treatment in animal models and/or in vitro models are predicted to be responsible for the therapeutic benefit of these agents and represent new therapeutic targets for the treatment of cardiovascular disease/atherosclerosis/ dyslipidemia/lipid disorders. 32248 was highly expressed in human liver.
Regulation of 32248 predicted to reduce total cholesterol and triglycerides.
Gene ID 60489
The human 60489 sequence (SEQ ID NO:27), which is approximately 1255 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1023 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 341 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:28).
As assessed by TaqMan analysis, 60489 mRNA expression is restricted to the liver, colon and small intestine in the human. In addition, 60489 mRNA was upregulated in human hepatocytes that were treated with statins or PPAR alpha, either alone or in combination. 60489 is a novel member of the diacylglycerol acyltransferase family. These molecules are known to play a key role in triglyceride biosynthesis. Targeted inhibition of 60489 would be predicted to result in decreased triglycerides and thus be protective against atherosclerosis and hyperlipidemia.
Gene ID 93804
The human 93804 sequence (SEQ ID NO:29), (GT.4154286, known also as napsin A) which is approximately 1365 nucleotides long including untranslated regions, contains a predicted methionine-initiated coding sequence of about 1260 nucleotides, including the termination codon. The coding sequence encodes a 420 amino acid protein (SEQ ID NO:30) (GI:4154287).
93804, is regulated in in vitro and in vivo models of atherosclerosis as assessed by TaqMan analysis and in situ hybridization.93804 mRNA is up-regulated during lipid- loading in monocytes and macrophages. One of the hallmarks of the beginning of atherogenesis is the formation of lipid-laden macroophages. 93804, shows transcriptional up-regulation during a lipid-loading paradigm in an in vitro monocyte/macrophage culture system. Multiple studies with multiple donors were performed. In one of the donor studies (donor one), the monocytes were stimulated with moderately oxdized LDL (ox- LDL) for various times; 6hours, 48 hours and 72 hours. The stimulation by the modified ox-LDL loads the lipids in monocytes. 93804 exhibited minor up-regulation, 1.3X, during 6 hours stimulation via moderately oxdized LDL. In a long-term stimulation by modified ox-LDL, 93804 showed moderate up-regulation, 7.2X, during the lipid-loading process in monoctyes. In one of the other donor studies (donor six), the monocytes were stimulated with various modified LDLs; mildly oxdized LDL, moderately oxdized LDL, and acetylated LDL. 93804 was upregulated by all three reagents.
93804 was up-regulated in lesion the prone region of ApoE deficient vessels. ApoE deficient animals form atherosclerotic lesions spontaneously. The lesions are formed in the aortic root area and an arch portion of the asending aorta while very little to no lesions are formed in the desending aorta. 93804 showed greater expression in ApoE deficient animals in athero-lesion enriched region compared to non-lesion area of aorta. This was observed quantitatively by TaqMan experiments. In particular, the expression of 93804 was higher in the arch region of the aorta when it was compared to the region of the desending aorta.
93804 was up-regulated in a monkey atheroma model. 93804 showed elevated expression in the monkey atheroma vessels compared to nomal vessels by TaqMan experiments. Among three normal monky vessels observed for this study, the expression of 93804 mRNA was not detected. Among six monkey atheroma vessels observed for this study, the expression of 93804 mRNA was detected in four atheroma samples.
93804 shows very restricted expression among various human organs. The highest expression was found in lung. Low to midium expression was shown in tonsil, lymph node, brain and kidney.
Atherosclerosis is considered a chronic inflammatory disease, resulting from interaction between activated monocyte/macropohages, endothelial cells, smooth muscle cells, and humoral and cell-mediated immunological response of arterial wall. For this reason, the identification of genes that are involved in these vascular mechanisms can lead to novel and effective therapeutic targets to prevent atherosclerosis.
93804 belongs to a family of aspartic proteases. Aspartic proteinases are classified by having two aspartic residues that are responsible for the catalytic mechanism. Several well-defined enzymes belong to this family of enzyme: Pepsin, gastricsin, renin, catehpsins, and HIV protease. During last three decades, the family of aspartic proteinases were studied intensely due to their important roles in physiology/pathophysiology.
93804 shows up-regulation during lipid-loading process in monocytemacrophage suggesting its role in atherogenesis. 93804 blockade might lower the lesion formation in atherosclerotic vessels, thereby attenuating the progression of atherogenesis. 93804, is regulated in both in vitro and in vivo paradigms that represent the atherogenesis processes. 93804 is up-regulated during lipid-loading process in monocye/macropahge in an in vitro study. In addition, 93804 showed increased expression in ApoE deficient animals in athero-lesion enriched region compared to non-lesion area of aorta. These regulations strongly suggest the atherogenic effect of 93804. Therefore, inhibition of 93804 would result in a decrease in atherogenesis. Various aspects of the invention are described in further detail in the following subsections: I. Screening Assays:
The invention provides a method (also referred to herein as a "screening assay") for identifying modulators, i.e., candidate or test compounds or agents (e.g., peptides, peptidomimetics, small molecules (organic or inorganic) or other drugs) which bind to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, have a stimulatory or inhibitory effect on, for example, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, or have a stimulatory or inhibitory effect on, for example, the expression or activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate. Compounds identified using the assays described herein may be useful for treating cardiovascular diseases, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis.
These assays are designed to identify compounds that bind to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, bind to other intracellular or extracellular proteins that interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, and interfere with the interaction of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein with other intercellular or extracellular proteins. For example, in the case of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, which is a transmembrane receptor-type protein, such techniques can identify ligands for such a receptor. A 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein ligand or substrate can, for example, be used to ameliorate cardiovascular diseases, e.g., atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, thrombosis and endothelial cell disorders. Such compounds may include, but are not limited to peptides, antibodies, or small organic or inorganic compounds. Such compounds may also include other cellular proteins.
Compounds identified via assays such as those described herein may be useful, for example, for ameliorating cardiovascular disease, e.g., athersclerosis and/or thrombosis. In instances whereby a cardiovascular disease condition results from an overall lower level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression and/or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein in a cell or tissue, compounds that interact with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein may include compounds which accentuate or amplify the activity of the bound 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Such compounds would bring about an effective increase in the level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein activity, thus ameliorating symptoms.
In other instances, mutations within the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene may cause aberrant types or excessive amounts of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins to be made which have a deleterious effect that leads to a cardiovascular disease. Similarly, physiological conditions may cause an excessive increase in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression leading to a cardiovascular disease. In such cases, compounds that bind to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein may be identified that inhibit the activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Assays for testing the effectiveness of compounds identified by techniques such as those described in this section are discussed herein.
In one embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which are substrates of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or polypeptide or biologically active portion thereof. In another embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which bind to or modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or polypeptide or biologically active portion thereof. The test compounds of the present invention can be obtained using any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the 'one-bead one-compound' library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection. The biological library approach is limited to peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, K.S. (1997) Anticancer Drug Des. 12:145).
Examples of methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries can be found in the art, for example in: DeWitt et al. (1993) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:6909; Erb et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:11422; Zuckermann et al. (1994). J. Med. Chem. 37:2678; Cho et al. (1993) Science 261:1303; Carrell et al. (1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33:2059; Carell et al. (1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl 33:2061; and in Gallop et al. (1994) 7. Med. Chem. 37:1233.
Libraries of compounds may be presented in solution (e.g., Houghten (1992) Biotechniques 13:412-421), or on beads (Lam (1991) Nature 354:82-84), chips (Fodor (1993) Nature 364:555-556), bacteria (Ladner USP 5,223,409), spores (Ladner USP '409), plasmids (Cull et al. (1992) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 89:1865-1869) or on phage (Scott and Smith (1990) Science 249:386-390); (Devlin (1990) Science 249:404-406); (Cwirla et al. (1990) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 87:6378-6382); (Felici (1991) J. Mol. Biol. 222:301- 310); (Ladner supra.).
In one embodiment, an assay is a cell-based assay in which a cell which expresses a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is determined. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity can be accomplished by monitoring, for example, intracellular calcium, IP3, cAMP, or diacylglycerol concentration, the phosphorylation profile of intracellular proteins, cell proliferation and/or migration, gene expression of, for example, cell surface adhesion molecules or genes associated with angiogenesis, or the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -regulated transcription factor. The cell can be of mammalian origin, e.g., an endothelial cell. In one embodiment, compounds that interact with a receptor domain can be screened for their ability to function as ligands, i.e., to bind to the receptor and modulate a signal transduction pathway. Identification of ligands, and measuring the activity of the ligand-receptor complex, leads to the identification of modulators (e.g., antagonists) of this interaction. Such modulators may be useful in the treatment of cardiovascular disease. The ability of the test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 binding to a substrate or to bind to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can also be determined. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 binding to a substrate can be accomplished, for example, by coupling the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate with a radioisotope or enzymatic label such that binding of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, ,12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be determined by detecting the labeled 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate in a complex. 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 could also be coupled with a radioisotope or enzymatic label to monitor the ability of a test compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 binding to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate in a complex. Determining the ability of the test compound to bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be accomplished, for example, by coupling the compound with a radioisotope or enzymatic label such that binding of the compound to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be determined by detecting the labeled 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 compound in a complex. For example, compounds (e.g., 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ligands or substrates) can be labeled with 125^ 35s; 14c, or ^H, either directly or indirectly, and the radioisotope detected by direct counting of radioemmission or by scintillation counting. Compounds can further be enzymatically labeled with, for example, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase, and the enzymatic label detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product.
It is also within the scope of this invention to determine the ability of a compound (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ligand or substrate) to interact with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 without the labeling of any of the interactants. For example, a microphysiometer can be used to detect the interaction of a compound with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921 , 32248, 60489 or 93804 without the labeling of either the compound or the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 (McConnell, H. M. et al (1992) Science 257:1906-1912. As used herein, a "microphysiometer" (e.g., Cytosensor) is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a light-addressable potentiometric sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between a compound and 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
In another embodiment, an assay is a cell-based assay comprising contacting a cell expressing a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate) with a test compound and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate (e.g., stimulate or inhibit) the activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can be accomplished, for example, by determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to bind to or interact with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule.
Determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or a biologically active fragment thereof, to bind to or interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can be accomplished by one of the methods described above for determining direct binding. In a preferred embodiment, determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to bind to or interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can be accomplished by determining the activity of the target molecule. For example, the activity of the target molecule can be determined by detecting induction of a cellular second messenger of the target (i.e., intracellular Ca , diacylglycerol, IP3, cAMP), detecting catalytic/enzymatic activity of the target on an appropriate substrate, detecting the induction of a reporter gene (comprising a target-responsive regulatory element operatively linked to a nucleic acid encoding a detectable marker, e.g., luciferase), or detecting a target-regulated cellular response (e.g., gene expression).
In yet another embodiment, an assay of the present invention is a cell-free assay in which a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof, is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to bind to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof is determined. Preferred biologically active portions of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins to be used in assays of the present invention include fragments which participate in interactions with non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 molecules, e.g., fragments with high surface probability scores. Binding of the test compound to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be determined either directly or indirectly as described above. In a preferred embodiment, the assay includes contacting the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound which binds 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein comprises determining the ability of the test compound to preferentially bind to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 or biologically active portion thereof as compared to the known compound. Compounds that modulate the interaction of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 with a known target protein may be useful in regulating the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, especially a mutant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. In another embodiment, the assay is a cell-free assay in which a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate (e.g., stimulate or inhibit) the activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or, 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof is determined. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be accomplished, for example, by determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to bind to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule by one of the methods described above for determining direct binding. Determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to bind to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can also be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C. (1991) Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al. (1995) Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5:699-705). As used herein, "BIA" is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore). Changes in the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
In another embodiment, determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be accomplished by determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to further modulate the activity of a downstream effector of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule. For example, the activity of the effector molecule on an appropriate target can be determined or the binding of the effector to an appropriate target can be determined as previously described. In yet another embodiment, the cell-free assay involves contacting a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound which binds the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to interact with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, wherein determining the ability of the test compound to interact with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein comprises determining the ability of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to preferentially bind to or modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule.
In more than one embodiment of the above assay methods of the present invention, it may be desirable to immobilize either 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 or its target molecule to facilitate separation of complexed from uncomplexed forms of one or both of the proteins, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay. Binding of a test compound to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, or interaction of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein with a target molecule in the presence and absence of a candidate compound, can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants. Examples of such vessels include microtitre plates, test tubes, and micro-centrifuge tubes. In one embodiment, a fusion protein can be provided which adds a domain that allows one or both of the proteins to be bound to a matrix. For example, glutathione-S-transferase/139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion proteins or glutathione-S- transferase/target fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, MO) or glutathione derivatized microtitre plates, which are then combined with the test compound or the test compound and either the non-adsorbed target protein or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, and the mixture incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads or microtitre plate wells are washed to remove any unbound components, the matrix immobilized in the case of beads, complex determined either directly or indirectly, for example, as described above. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, and the level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 binding or activity determined using standard techniques.
Other techniques for immobilizing proteins on matrices can also be used in the screening assays of the invention. For example, either a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin. Biotinylated 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or target molecules can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N- hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, IL), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical). Alternatively, antibodies reactive with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or target molecules but which do not interfere with binding of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and unbound target or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation. Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or target molecule, as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or target molecule.
In another embodiment, modulators of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression are identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein in the cell is determined. The level of expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein is greater (statistically significantly greater) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein expression. Alternatively, when expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein is less (statistically significantly less) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein expression. The level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein expression in the cells can be determined by methods described herein for detecting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or protein. In yet another aspect of the invention, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660,
8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins can be used as "bait proteins" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 5,283,317; Zervos et al. (1993) Cell 72:223-232; Madura et al. (1993) J. Biol. Chem. 268:12046- 12054; Barrel et al. (1993) Biotechniques 14:920-924; Iwabuchi et al. (1993) Oncogene 8: 1693-1696; and Brent WO94/10300), to identify other proteins, which bind to or interact with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ("139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -binding proteins" or "139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -bp") and are involved in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. Such 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -binding proteins are also likely to be involved in the propagation of signals by the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 targets as, for example, downstream elements of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -mediated signaling pathway. Alternatively, such 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -binding proteins are likely to be 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 inhibitors.
The two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains. Briefly, the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs. In one construct, the gene that codes for a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein is fused to a gene encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4). In the other construct, a DNA sequence, from a library of DNA sequences, that encodes an unidentified protein ("prey" or "sample") is fused to a gene that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor. If the "bait" and the "prey" proteins are able to interact, in vivo, forming a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -dependent complex, the DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ) which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor. Expression of the reporter gene can be detected and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the cloned gene which encodes the protein which interacts with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. In another aspect, the invention pertains to a combination of two or more of the assays described herein. For example, a modulating agent can be identified using a cell- based or a cell free assay, and the ability of the agent to modulate the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be confirmed in vivo, e.g., in an animal such as an animal model for cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis, as described herein.
This invention further pertains to novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to further use an agent identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model. For example, an agent identified as described herein (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulating agent, an antisense 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecule, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -specific antibody, or a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 - binding partner) can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent. Alternatively, an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent. Furthermore, this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above- described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
Any of the compounds, including but not limited to compounds such as those identified in the foregoing assay systems, may be tested for the ability to treat cardiovascular disease symptoms. Cell-based and animal model-based assays for the identification of compounds exhibiting such an ability to ameliorate cardiovascular disease systems are described herein.
In one aspect, cell-based systems, as described herein, may be used to identify compounds which may act to treat at least one cardiovascular disease symptom. For example, such cell systems may be exposed to a compound, suspected of exhibiting an ability to treat cardiovascular disease symptoms, at a sufficient concentration and for a time sufficient to elicit such an amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms in the exposed cells. After exposure, the cells are examined to determine whether one or more of the cardiovascular disease cellular phenotypes has been altered to resemble a more normal or more wild type, non-cardiovascular disease phenotype. Cellular phenotypes that are associated with cardiovascular disease states include aberrant proliferation and migration, angiogenesis, deposition of extracellular matrix components, accumulation of intracellular lipids, and expression of growth factors, cytokines, and other inflammatory mediators.
In addition, animal-based cardiovascular disease systems, such as those described herein, may be used to identify compounds capable of ameliorating cardiovascular disease symptoms. Such animal models may be used as test substrates for the identification of drugs, pharmaceuticals, therapies, and interventions which may be effective in treating cardiovascular disease. For example, animal models may be exposed to a compound, suspected of exhibiting an ability to ameliorate cardiovascular disease symptoms, at a sufficient concentration and for a time sufficient to elicit such an amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms in the exposed animals. The response of the animals to the exposure may be monitored by assessing the reversal of disorders associated with cardiovascular disease, for example, by counting the number of atherosclerotic plaques and/or measuring their size before and after treatment.
With regard to intervention, any treatments which reverse any aspect of cardiovascular disease symptoms should be considered as candidates for human cardiovascular disease therapeutic intervention. Dosages of test agents may be determined by deriving dose-response curves.
Additionally, gene expression patterns may be utilized to assess the ability of a compound to ameliorate cardiovascular disease symptoms. For example, the expression pattern of one or more genes may form part of a "gene expression profile" or
"transcriptional profile" which may be then be used in such an assessment. "Gene expression profile" or "transcriptional profile", as used herein, includes the pattern of mRNA expression obtained for a given tissue or cell type under a given set of conditions.
Such conditions may include, but are not limited to, atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion, hypertension, restenosis, and arterial inflammation, including any of the control or experimental conditions described herein, for example, atherogenic cytokine stimulation of macrophages. Gene expression profiles may be generated, for example, by utilizing a differential display procedure, Northern analysis and/or RT-PCR. In one embodiment,
139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences may be used as probes and/or PCR primers for the generation and corroboration of such gene expression profiles.
Gene expression profiles may be characterized for known states, either cardiovascular disease or normal, within the cell- and/or animal-based model systems.
Subsequently, these known gene expression profiles may be compared to ascertain the effect a test compound has to modify such gene expression profiles, and to cause the profile to more closely resemble that of a more desirable profile.
For example, administration of a compound may cause the gene expression profile of a cardiovascular disease model system to more closely resemble the control system.
Administration of a compound may, alternatively, cause the gene expression profile of a control system to begin to mimic a cardiovascular disease state. Such a compound may, for example, be used in further characterizing the compound of interest, or may be used in the generation of additional animal models. II. Cell- and Animal-Based Model Systems
Described herein are cell- and animal-based systems which act as models for cardiovascular disease. These systems may be used in a variety of applications. For example, the cell- and animal-based model systems may be used to further characterize differentially expressed genes associated with cardiovascular disease, e.g., 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 . In addition, animal- and cell-based assays may be used as part of screening strategies . designed to identify compounds which are capable of ameliorating cardiovascular disease symptoms, as described, below. Thus, the animal- and cell-based models may be used to identify drugs, pharmaceuticals, therapies and interventions which may be effective in treating cardiovascular disease. Furthermore, such animal models may be used to determine the LD50 and the ED50 in animal subjects, and such data can be used to determine the in vivo efficacy of potential cardiovascular disease treatments.
A. Animal-Based Systems
Animal-based model systems of cardiovascular disease may include, but are not limited to, non-recombinant and engineered transgenic animals.
Non-recombinant animal models for cardiovascular disease may include, for example, genetic models. Such genetic cardiovascular disease models may include, for example, ApoB or ApoR deficient pigs (Rapacz, et al, 1986, Science 234:1573-1577) and Watanabe heritable hyperlipidemic (WHHL) rabbits (Kita et al, 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 84: 5928-5931). Transgenic mouse models in cardiovascular disease and angiogenesis are reviewed in Carmeliet, P. and Collen, D. (2000) J. Pathol. 190:387-405. Non-recombinant, non-genetic animal models of atherosclerosis may include, for example, pig, rabbit, or rat models in which the animal has been exposed to either chemical wounding through dietary supplementation of LDL, or mechanical wounding through balloon catheter angioplasty. Animal models of cardiovascular disease also include rat myocardial infarction models (described in, for example, Schwarz, ER et al (2000) J. Am. Coll Cardiol 35:1323-1330) and models of chromic cardiac ischemia in rabbits (described in, for example, Operschall, C et al. (2000) J. Appl. Physiol 88:1438- 1445).
Additionally, animal models exhibiting cardiovascular disease symptoms may be engineered by using, for example, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences described above, in conjunction with techniques for producing transgenic animals that are well known to those of skill in the art. For example, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences may be introduced into, and overexpressed in, the genome of the animal of interest, or, if endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences are present, they may either be overexpressed or, alternatively, be disrupted in order to underexpress or inactivate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, such as described for the disruption of ApoE in mice (Plump et al, 1992, Cell 71: 343-353). The host cells of the invention can also be used to produce non-human transgenic animals. For example, in one embodiment, a host cell of the invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -coding sequences have been introduced. Such host cells can then be used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences have been altered. Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. As used herein, a "transgenic animal" is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal includes a transgene. Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, and the like. A transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal, thereby directing the expression of an encoded gene product in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal. As used herein, a "homologous recombinant animal" is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a mouse, in which an endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene has been altered by homologous recombination between the endogenous gene and an exogenous DNA molecule introduced into a cell of the animal, e.g., an embryonic cell of the animal, prior to development of the animal.
A transgenic animal used in the methods of the invention can be created by introducing a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection, retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal. The 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 cDNA sequence can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal. Alternatively, a nonhuman homologue of a human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, such as a mouse or rat 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, can be used as a transgene. Alternatively, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene homologue, such as another 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 family member, can be isolated based on hybridization to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 cDNA sequences and used as a transgene. Intronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression of the transgene. A tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 transgene to direct expression of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to particular cells. Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, both by Leder et al, U.S. Patent No. 4,873,191 by Wagner et al. and in Hogan, B., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y., 1986). Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals. A transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 transgene in its genome and/or expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
To create a homologous recombinant animal, a vector is prepared which contains at least a portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene. The 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene can be a human gene but more preferably, is a non-human homologue of a human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene. For example, a rat 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene can be used to construct a homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule, e.g., a vector, suitable for altering an endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene in the mouse genome. In a preferred embodiment, the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also referred to as a "knock out" vector).
Alternatively, the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered to thereby alter the expression of the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein). In the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule, the altered portion of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene is flanked at its 5' and 3' ends by additional nucleic acid sequence of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene to allow for homologous recombination to occur between the exogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene carried by the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule and an endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene in a cell, e.g., an embryonic stem cell. The additional flanldng 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid sequence is of sufficient length for successful homologous recombination with the endogenous gene. Typically, several kilobases of flanldng DNA (both at the 5' and 3' ends) are included in the homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule (see, e.g., Thomas, K.R. and Capecchi, M. R. (1987) Cell 51:503 for a description of homologous recombination vectors). The homologous recombination nucleic acid molecule is introduced into a cell, e.g., an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene has homologously recombined with the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene are selected (see e.g., Li, E. et al. (1992) Cell 69:915). The selected cells can then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, E.J. Robertson, ed. (IRL, Oxford, 1987) pp. 113-152). A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term. Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene. Methods for constructing homologous recombination nucleic acid molecules, e.g., vectors, or homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley, A. (1991) Current Opinion in Biotechnology 2:823-829 and in PCT International Publication Nos.: WO 90/11354 by Le Mouellec et al; ΨO 91/01140 by Smithies et al.; WO 92/0968 by Zijlstra et al; and WO 93/04169 by Berns et al. In another embodiment, transgenic non-human animals for use in the methods of the invention can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene. One example of such a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage PI. For a description of the cre/loxP recombinase system, see, e.g., Lakso et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:6232-6236. Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of Saccharomyces cerevisiae
(O'Gorman et al. (1991) Science 251:1351-1355. If a cre/loxP recombinase system is used to regulate expression of the transgene, animals containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein are required. Such animals can be provided through the construction of "double" transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.
Clones of the non-human transgenic animals described herein can also be produced according to the methods described in Wilmut, I. et al. (1997) Nature 385:810-813 and PCT International Publication Nos. WO 97/07668 and WO 97/07669. In brief, a cell, e.g., a somatic cell, from the transgenic animal can be isolated and induced to exit the growth cycle and enter G0 phase. The quiescent cell can then be fused, e.g., through the use of electrical pulses, to an enucleated oocyte from an animal of the same species from which the quiescent cell is isolated. The reconstructed oocyte is then cultured such that it develops to morula or blastocyte and then transferred to pseudopregnant female foster animal. The offspring borne of this female foster animal will be a clone of the animal from which the cell, e.g., the somatic cell, is isolated.
The 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 transgenic animals that express 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 peptide (detected immunocytochemically, using antibodies directed against 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 epitopes) at easily detectable levels should then be further evaluated to identify those animals which display characteristic cardiovascular disease symptoms. Such cardiovascular disease symptoms may include, for example, increased prevalence and size of fatty streaks and/or cardiovascular disease plaques.
Additionally, specific cell types (e.g., endothelial cells) within the transgenic animals may be analyzed and assayed for cellular phenotypes characteristic of cardiovascular disease. In the case of endothelial cells, such phenotypes include, but are not limited to cell proliferation, migration, angiogenesis, production of proinflammatory growth factors and cytokines, and adhesion to inflammatory cells. In the case of monocytes, such phenotypes may include but are not limited to increases in rates of LDL uptake, adhesion to endothelial cells, transmigration, foam cell formation, fatty streak formation, and production of foam cell specific products. Cellular phenotypes may include a particular cell type's pattern of expression of genes associated with cardiovascular disease as compared to known expression profiles of the particular cell type in animals exhibiting cardiovascular disease symptoms. B. Cell-Based Systems
Cells that contain and express 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences which encode a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, and, further, exhibit cellular phenotypes associated with cardiovascular disease, may be used to identify compounds that exhibit anti-cardiovascular disease activity. Such cells may include non-recombinant monocyte cell lines, such as U937 (ATCC# CRL-1593), THP-1 (ATCC#TIB-202), and P388Dl (ATCC# TB3-63); endothelial cells such as human umbilical vein endothelial cells (HUNECs), human microvascular endothelial cells (HMVEC), and bovine aortic endothelial cells (BAECs); as well as generic mammalian cell lines such as HeLa cells and COS cells, e.g., COS-7 (ATCC# CRL-1651). Further, such cells may include recombinant, transgenic cell lines. For example, the cardiovascular disease animal models of the invention, discussed above, may be used to generate cell lines, containing one or more cell types involved in cardiovascular disease, that can be used as cell culture models for this disorder. While primary cultures derived from the cardiovascular disease transgenic animals of the invention may be utilized, the generation of continuous cell lines is preferred. For examples of techniques which may be used to derive a continuous cell line from the transgenic animals, see Small et al, (1985) Mol Cell Biol 5:642-648. Alternatively, cells of a cell type known to be involved in cardiovascular disease may be transfected with sequences capable of increasing or decreasing the amount of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression within the cell. For example, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences may be introduced into, and overexpressed in, the genome of the cell of interest, or, if endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences are present, they may be either overexpressed or, alternatively disrupted in order to underexpress or inactivate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression. In order to overexpress a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183,
10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, the coding portion of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene may be ligated to a regulatory sequence which is capable of driving gene expression in the cell type of interest, e.g., an endothelial cell. Such regulatory regions will be well known to those of skill in the art, and may be utilized in the absence of undue experimentation. Recombinant methods for expressing target genes are described above. For underexpression of an endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequence, such a sequence may be isolated and engineered such that when reintroduced into the genome of the cell type of interest, the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 alleles will be inactivated. Preferably, the engineered 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence is introduced via gene targeting such that the endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence is disrupted upon integration of the engineered 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence into the cell's genome. Transfection of host cells with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genes is discussed, above.
Cells treated with compounds or transfected with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genes can be examined for phenotypes associated with cardiovascular disease. In the case of monocytes, such phenotypes include but are not limited to increases in rates of LDL uptake, adhesion to endothelial cells, transmigration, foam cell formation, fatty streak formation, and production by foam cells of growth factors such as bFGF, IGF-I, VEGF, IL-1, M-CSF. TGFβ, TGFα, TNFα, HB-EGF, PDGF, J-FN-γ, and GM-CSF. Transmigration rates, for example, may be measured using the in vitro system of Navab et al. (1988) J. Clin. Invest. 82:1853-1863, by quantifying the number of monocytes that migrate across the endothelial monolayer and into the collagen layer of the subendothelial space.
Similarly, endothelial cells can be treated with test compounds or transfected with genetically engineered 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genes. The endothelial cells can then be examined for phenotypes associated with cardiovascular disease, including, but not limited to changes in cellular morphology, cell proliferation, cell migration, and mononuclear cell adhesion; or for the effects on production of other proteins involved in cardiovascular disease such as adhesion molecules (e.g., ICAM, VCAM, E-selectin), growth factors and cytokines (e.g., PDGF, IL-lβ, TNFα, MCF), and proteins involved in angiogenesis (e.g., FLK, FLT).
Transfection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid may be accomplished by using standard techniques (described in, for example, Ausubel (1989) supra). Transfected cells should be evaluated for the presence of the recombinant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences, for expression and accumulation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA, and for the presence of recombinant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein production. In instances wherein a decrease in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression is desired, standard techniques may be used to demonstrate whether a decrease in endogenous 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression and/or in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein production is achieved.
Cellular models for the study of cardiovascular disease and angiogenesis include models of endothelial cell differentiation on Matrigel (Baatout, S. et al. (1996) Rom. J. Intern. Med. 34:263-269; Benelli, R et al. (1999) Int. J. Biol Markers 14:243-246), embryonic stem cell models of vascular morphogenesis (Doetschman, T. et al. (1993) Hypertension 22:618-629), the culture of microvessel fragments in physiological gels (Hoying, JB et al. (1996) In Vitro Cell Dev. Biol. Anim. 32: 409-419; US Patent No. 5,976,782), and the treatment of endothelial cells and smooth muscle cells with atherogenic and angiogenic factors including growth factors and cytokines (e.g., IL-lβ, PDGF, TNFα, VEGF), homocysteine, and LDL. In vitro angiogenesis models are described in, for example, Black, AF et al. (1999) Cell Biol. Toxicol. 15:81-90.
III. Predictive Medicine: The present invention also pertains to the field of predictive medicine in which diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, and monitoring clinical trials are used for prognostic (predictive) purposes to thereby treat an individual prophylactically. Accordingly, one aspect of the present invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein and/or nucleic acid expression as well as 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, in the context of a biological sample (e.g., blood, serum, cells, e.g., endothelial cells, or tissue, e.g., vascular tissue) to thereby determine whether an individual is afflicted with a cardiovascular disease. The invention also provides for prognostic (or predictive) assays for determining whether an individual is at risk of developing a cardiovascular disorder. For example, mutations in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene can be assayed for in a biological sample. Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive purpose to thereby phophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset of a cardiovascular disorder, e.g., atherosclerosis.
Another aspect of the invention pertains to monitoring the influence of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulators (e.g., anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ribozymes) on the expression or activity of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 in clinical trials.
These and other agents are described in further detail in the following sections.
A. Diagnostic Assays For Cardiovascular Disease
To determine whether a subject is afflicted with a cardiovascular disease, a biological sample may be obtained from a subject and the biological sample may be contacted with a compound or an agent capable of detecting a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or nucleic acid (e.g., mRNA or genomic DNA) that encodes a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, in the biological sample. A preferred agent for detecting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or genomic DNA is a labeled nucleic acid probe capable of hybridizing to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or genomic DNA. The nucleic acid probe can be, for example, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid set forth in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion thereof, such as an oligonucleotide of at least 15, 20, 25, 30, 25, 40, 45, 50, 100, 250 or 500 nucleotides in length and sufficient to specifically hybridize under stringent conditions to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA or genomic DNA. Other suitable probes for use in the diagnostic assays of the invention are described herein. A preferred agent for detecting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587,
10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein in a sample is an antibody capable of binding to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, preferably an antibody with a detectable label. Antibodies can be polyclonal, or more preferably, monoclonal. An intact antibody, or a fragment thereof (e.g., Fab or F(ab')2) can be used. The term "labeled", with regard to the probe or antibody, is intended to encompass direct labeling of the probe or antibody by coupling (i.e., physically linking) a detectable substance to the probe or antibody, as well as indirect labeling of the probe or antibody by reactivity with another reagent that is directly labeled. Examples of indirect labeling include detection of a primary antibody using a fluorescently labeled secondary antibody and end-labeling of a DNA probe with biotin such that it can be detected with fluorescently labeled streptavidin.
The term "biological sample" is intended to include tissues, cells, and biological fluids isolated from a subject, as well as tissues, cells, and fluids present within a subject. That is, the detection method of the invention can be used to detect 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA, protein, or genomic DNA in a biological sample in vitro as well as in vivo. For example, in vitro techniques for detection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. In vitro techniques for detection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein include enzyme linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence. In vitro techniques for detection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genomic DNA include Southern hybridizations. Furthermore, in vivo techniques for detection of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein include introducing into a subject a labeled anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody. For example, the antibody can be labeled with a radioactive marker whose presence and location in a subject can be detected by standard imaging techniques. In another embodiment, the methods further involve obtaining a control biological sample from a control subject, contacting the control sample with a compound or agent capable of detecting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA, or genomic DNA, such that the presence of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA or genomic DNA is detected in the biological sample, and comparing the presence of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA or genomic DNA in the control sample with the presence of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA or genomic DNA in the test sample.
B. Prognostic Assays For Cardiovascular Disease
The present invention further pertains to methods for identifying subjects having or at risk of developing a cardiovascular disease associated with aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity.
As used herein, the term "aberrant" includes a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity which deviates from the wild type 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity. Aberrant expression or activity includes increased or decreased expression or activity, as well as expression or activity which does not follow the wild type developmental pattern of expression or the subcellular pattern of expression. For example, aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity is intended to include the cases in which a mutation in the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene causes the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene to be under-expressed or over-expressed and situations in which such mutations result in a non-functional 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or a protein which does not function in a wild-type fashion, e.g., a protein which does not interact with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate, or one which interacts with a non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate.
The assays described herein, such as the preceding diagnostic assays or the following assays, can be used to identify a subject having or at risk of developing a cardiovascular disease, e.g., including but not limited to, atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, and endothelial cell disorders. A biological sample may be obtained from a subject and tested for the presence or absence of a genetic alteration. For example, such genetic alterations can be detected by ascertaining the existence of at least one of 1) a deletion of one or more nucleotides from a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, 2) an addition of one or more nucleotides to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, 3) a substitution of one or more nucleotides of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, 4) a chromosomal rearrangement of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, 5) an alteration in the level of a messenger RNA transcript of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, 6) aberrant modification of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, such as of the methylation pattern of the genomic DNA, 7) the presence of a non-wild type splicing pattern of a messenger RNA transcript of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, 8) a non-wild type level of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -protein, 9) allelic loss of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, and 10) inappropriate post-translational modification of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -protein.
As described herein, there are a large number of assays known in the art which can be used for detecting genetic alterations in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene. For example, a genetic alteration in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene may be detected using a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202), such as anchor PCR or RACE PCR, or, alternatively, in a ligation chain reaction (LCR) (see, e.g., Landegran et al. (1988) Science 241:1077-1080; and Nakazawa et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:360-364), the latter of which can be particularly useful for detecting point mutations in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene (see Abravaya et al. (1995) Nucleic Acids Res. 23:675-682). This method includes collecting a biological sample from a subject, isolating nucleic acid (e.g., genomic DNA, mRNA or both) from the sample, contacting the nucleic acid sample with one or more primers which specifically hybridize to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene under conditions such that hybridization and amplification of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene (if present) occurs, and detecting the presence or absence of an amplification product, or detecting the size of the amplification product and comparing the length to a control sample. It is anticipated that PCR and/or LCR may be desirable to use as a preliminary amplification step in conjunction with any of the techniques used for detecting mutations described herein.
Alternative amplification methods include: self sustained sequence replication (Guatelli, J.C. et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:1874-1878), transcriptional amplification system (Kwoh, D.Y. et al. (1989) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 86:1173 177), Q-Beta Replicase (Lizardi, P.M. et al. (1988) Bio-Technology 6:1197), or any other nucleic acid amplification method, followed by the detection of the amplified molecules using techniques well known to those of skill in the art. These detection schemes are especially useful for the detection of nucleic acid molecules if such molecules are present in very low numbers.
In an alternative embodiment, mutations in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene from a biological sample can be identified by alterations in restriction enzyme cleavage patterns. For example, sample and control DNA is isolated, amplified (optionally), digested with one or more restriction endonucleases, and fragment length sizes are determined by gel electrophoresis and compared. Differences in fragment length sizes between sample and control DNA indicates mutations in the sample DNA. Moreover, the use of sequence specific ribozymes (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5,498,531) can be used to score for the presence of specific mutations by development or loss of a ribozyme cleavage site. In other embodiments, genetic mutations in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be identified by hybridizing biological sample derived and control nucleic acids, e.g., DNA or RNA, to high density arrays containing hundreds or thousands of oligonucleotide probes (Cronin, M.T. et al. (1996) Human Mutation 7:244-255; Kozal, M.J. et al. (1996) Nature Medicine 2:753-759). For example, genetic mutations in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be identified in two dimensional arrays containing light-generated DNA probes as described in Cronin, M.T. et al. (1996) supra. Briefly, a first hybridization array of probes can be used to scan through long stretches of DNA in a sample and control to identify base changes between the sequences by making linear arrays of sequential, overlapping probes. This step allows for the identification of point mutations. This step is followed by a second hybridization array that allows for the characterization of specific mutations by using smaller, specialized probe arrays complementary to all variants or mutations detected. Each mutation array is composed of parallel probe sets, one complementary to the wild-type gene and the other complementary to the mutant gene. In yet another embodiment, any of a variety of sequencing reactions known in the art can be used to directly sequence the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene in a biological sample and detect mutations by comparing the sequence of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 in the biological sample with the corresponding wild-type (control) sequence. Examples of sequencing reactions include those based on techniques developed by Maxam and Gilbert (1977) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 74:560) or Sanger (1977) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 74:5463). It is also contemplated that any of a variety of automated sequencing procedures can be utilized when performing the diagnostic assays (Naeve, C. W. (1995) Biotechniques 19:448-53), including sequencing by mass spectrometry (see, e.g., PCT International Publication No. WO 94/16101; Cohen et al. (1996) Adv. Chromatogr. 36:127-162; and Griffin et al. (1993) Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol 38:147-159).
Other methods for detecting mutations in the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene include methods in which protection from cleavage agents is used to detect mismatched bases in RNA/RNA or RNA/DNA heteroduplexes (Myers et al (1985) Science 230: 1242). In general, the art technique of "mismatch cleavage" starts by providing heteroduplexes formed by hybridizing (labeled) RNA or DNA containing the wild-type 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence with potentially mutant RNA or DNA obtained from a tissue sample. The double-stranded duplexes are treated with an agent which cleaves single-stranded regions of the duplex such as which will exist due to basepair mismatches between the control and sample strands. For instance, RNA/DNA duplexes can be treated with RNase and DNA/DNA hybrids treated with SI nuclease to enzymatically digest the mismatched regions. In other embodiments, either DNA/DNA or RNA/DNA duplexes can be treated with hydroxylamine or osmium tetroxide and with piperidine in order to digest mismatched regions. After digestion of the mismatched regions, the resulting material is then separated by size on denaturing polyacrylamide gels to determine the site of mutation. See, for example, Cotton et al. (1988) Proc. Natl Acad Sci USA 85:4397 and Saleeba et al. (1992) Methods Enzymol. 217:286-295. In a preferred embodiment, the control DNA or RNA can be labeled for detection.
In still another embodiment, the mismatch cleavage reaction employs one or more proteins that recognize mismatched base pairs in double-stranded DNA (so called "DNA mismatch repair" enzymes) in defined systems for detecting and mapping point mutations in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 cDNAs obtained from samples of cells. For example, the mutY enzyme of E. coli cleaves A at G/A mismatches and the thymidine DNA glycosylase from HeLa cells cleaves T at G/T mismatches (Hsu et al. (1994) Car ino genesis 15:1657-1662). According to an exemplary embodiment, a probe based on a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence, e.g., a wild-type 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequence, is hybridized to a cDNA or other DNA product from a test cell(s). The duplex is treated with a DNA mismatch repair enzyme, and the cleavage products, if any, can be detected from electrophoresis protocols or the like. See, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5,459,039.
In other embodiments, alterations in electrophoretic mobility will be used to identify mutations in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 genes. For example, single strand conformation polymorphism (SSCP) may be used to detect differences in electrophoretic mobility between mutant and wild type nucleic acids (Orita et al. (1989) Proc Natl. Acad. Sci USA: 86:2766; see also Cotton (1993) Mutat. Res. 285: 125-144 and Hayashi (1992) Genet. Anal Tech. Appl 9:73-79). Single-stranded DNA fragments of sample and control 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acids will be denatured and allowed to renature. The secondary structure of single-stranded nucleic acids varies according to sequence, the resulting alteration in electrophoretic mobility enables the detection of even a single base change. The DNA fragments may be labeled or detected with labeled probes. The sensitivity of the assay may be enhanced by using RNA (rather than DNA), in which the secondary structure is more sensitive to a change in sequence. In a preferred embodiment, the subject method utilizes heteroduplex analysis to separate double stranded heteroduplex molecules on the basis of changes in electrophoretic mobility (Keen et al. (1991) Trends Genet 7:5).
In yet another embodiment the movement of mutant or wild-type fragments in polyacrylamide gels containing a gradient of denaturant is assayed using denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (DGGE) (Myers et al. (1985) Nαtwre 313:495). When DGGE is used as the method of analysis, DΝA will be modified to ensure that it does not completely denature, for example by adding a GC clamp of approximately 40 bp of high- melting GC-rich DΝA by PCR. In a further embodiment, a temperature gradient is used in place of a denaturing gradient to identify differences in the mobility of control and sample DΝA (Rosenbaum and Reissner (1987) Biophys Chem 265:12753).
Examples of other techniques for detecting point mutations include, but are not limited to, selective oligonucleotide hybridization, selective amplification, or selective primer extension. For example, oligonucleotide primers may be prepared in which the known mutation is placed centrally and then hybridized to target DΝA under conditions which permit hybridization only if a perfect match is found (Saiki et al. (1986) Nature 324:163); Saiki et al. (1989) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci USA 86:6230). Such allele specific oligonucleotides are hybridized to PCR amplified target DΝA or a number of different mutations when the oligonucleotides are attached to the hybridizing membrane and hybridized with labeled target DΝA.
Alternatively, allele specific amplification technology which depends on selective PCR amplification may be used in conjunction with the instant invention. Oligonucleotides used as primers for specific amplification may carry the mutation of interest in the center of the molecule (so that amplification depends on differential hybridization) (Gibbs et al. (1989) Nucleic Acids Res. 17:2437-2448) or at the extreme 3' end of one primer where, under appropriate conditions, mismatch can prevent, or reduce polymerase extension (Prossner (1993) Tibtech 11:238). In addition it may be desirable to introduce a novel restriction site in the region of the mutation to create cleavage-based detection (Gasparini et al. (1992) Mol. Cell Probes 6: 1). It is anticipated that in certain embodiments amplification may also be performed using Taq ligase for amplification (Barany (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 88:189). In such cases, ligation will occur only if there is a perfect match at the 3' end of the 5' sequence making it possible to detect the presence of a known mutation at a specific site by looking for the presence or absence of amplification.
Furthermore, the prognostic assays described herein can be used to determine whether a subject can be administered a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator (e.g., an agonist, antagonist, peptidomimetic, protein, peptide, nucleic acid, or small molecule) to effectively treat a cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis.
C. Monitoring of Effects During Clinical Trials
The present invention further provides methods for determining the effectiveness of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator identified herein) in treating a cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis, in a subject. For example, the effectiveness of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator in increasing 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, protein levels, or in upregulating 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, can be monitored in clinical trials of subjects exhibiting decreased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, protein levels, or downregulated 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. Alternatively, the effectiveness of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator in decreasing 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, protein levels, or in downregulating 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, can be monitored in clinical trials of subjects exhibiting increased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression, protein levels, or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. In such clinical trials, the expression or activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, and preferably, other genes that have been implicated in, for example, atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis can be used as a "read out" or marker of the phenotype of a particular cell, e.g., a vascular endothelial cell.
For example, and not by way of limitation, genes, including 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 , that are modulated in cells by treatment with an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity (e.g., identified in a screening assay as described herein) can be identified. Thus, to study the effect of agents which modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity on subjects suffering from a cardiovascular disease in, for example, a clinical trial, cells can be isolated and RNA prepared and analyzed for the levels of expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 and other genes implicated in the cardiovascular disease. The levels of gene expression (e.g., a gene expression pattern) can be quantified by Northern blot analysis or RT-PCR, as described herein, or alternatively by measuring the amount of protein produced, by one of the methods described herein, or by measuring the levels of activity of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 or other genes. In this way, the gene expression pattern can serve as a marker, indicative of the physiological response of the cells to the agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. This response state may be determined before, and at various points during treatment of the individual with the agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
In a preferred embodiment, the present invention provides a method for monitoring the effectiveness of treatment of a subject with an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity (e.g., an agonist, antagonist, peptidomimetic, protein, peptide, nucleic acid, or small molecule identified by the screening assays described herein) including the steps of (i) obtaining a pre-administration sample from a subject prior to administration of the agent; (ii) detecting the level of expression of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA, or genomic DNA in the pre-administration sample; (iii) obtaining one or more post-administration samples from the subject; (iv) detecting the level of expression or activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA, or genomic DNA in the post-administration samples; (v) comparing the level of expression or activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA, or genomic DNA in the pre-administration sample with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, mRNA, or genomic DNA in the post administration sample or samples; and (vi) altering the administration of the agent to the subject accordingly. For example, increased administration of the agent may be desirable to increase the expression or activity of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 to higher levels than detected, i.e., to increase the effectiveness of the agent. Alternatively, decreased administration of the agent may be desirable to decrease expression or activity of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 to lower levels than detected, i.e. to decrease the effectiveness of the agent. According to such an embodiment, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity may be used as an indicator of the effectiveness of an agent, even in the absence of an observable phenotypic response.
IN. Methods of Treatment of Subjects Suffering From Cardiovascular Disease:
The present invention provides for both prophylactic and therapeutic methods of treating a subject, e.g., a human, at risk of (or susceptible to) a cardiovascular disease such as atherosclerosis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, hypertension, restenosis, arterial inflammation, thrombosis, and endothelial cell disorders. With regard to both prophylactic and therapeutic methods of treatment, such treatments may be specifically tailored or modified, based on knowledge obtained from the field of pharmacogenomics. "Pharmacogenomics," as used herein, refers to the application of genomics technologies such as gene sequencing, statistical genetics, and gene expression analysis to drugs in clinical development and on the market. More specifically, the term refers to the study of how a patient's genes determine his or her response to a drug (e.g., a patient's "drug response phenotype", or "drug response genotype"). Thus, another aspect of the invention provides methods for tailoring an subject's prophylactic or therapeutic treatment with either the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 molecules of the present invention or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulators according to that individual's drug response genotype. Pharmacogenomics allows a clinician or physician to target prophylactic or therapeutic treatments to patients who will most benefit from the treatment and to avoid treatment of patients who will experience toxic drug-related side effects.
A. Prophylactic Methods
In one aspect, the invention provides a method for preventing in a subject, a cardiovascular disease by administering to the subject an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, e.g., modulation of calcium influx, cellular migration, or formation of atherosclerotic lesions. Subjects at risk for a cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis and/or thrombosis, can be identified by, for example, any or a combination of the diagnostic or prognostic assays described herein. Administration of a prophylactic agent can occur prior to the manifestation of symptoms characteristic of aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity, such that a cardiovascular disease is prevented or, alternatively, delayed in its progression. Depending on the type of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 aberrancy, for example, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 , 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 agonist or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antagonist agent can be used for treating the subject. The appropriate agent can be determined based on screening assays described herein.
B. Therapeutic Methods
Described herein are methods and compositions whereby cardiovascular disease symptoms may be ameliorated. Certain cardiovascular diseases are brought about, at least in part, by an excessive level of a gene product, or by the presence of a gene product exhibiting an abnormal or excessive activity. As such, the reduction in the level and/or activity of such gene products would bring about the amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms. Techniques for the reduction of gene expression levels or the activity of a protein are discussed below. Alternatively, certain other cardiovascular diseases are brought about, at least in part, by the absence or reduction of the level of gene expression, or a reduction in the level of a protein's activity. As such, an increase in the level of gene expression and/or the activity of such proteins would bring about the amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms. In some cases, the up-regulation of a gene in a disease state reflects a protective role for that gene product in responding to the disease condition. Enhancement of such a gene's expression, or the activity of the gene product, will reinforce the protective effect it exerts. Some cardiovascular disease states may result from an abnormally low level of • activity of such a protective gene. In these cases also, an increase in the level of gene expression and/or the activity of such gene products would bring about the amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms. Techniques for increasing target gene expression levels or target gene product activity levels are discussed herein.
Accordingly, another aspect of the invention pertains to methods of modulating 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity for therapeutic purposes. Accordingly, in an exemplary embodiment, the modulatory method of the invention involves contacting a cell with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 or agent that modulates one or more of the activities of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein activity associated with the cell (e.g., an endothelial cell or an ovarian cell). An agent that modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein activity can be an agent as described herein, such as a nucleic acid or a protein, a naturally-occurring target molecule of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ligand or substrate), a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 agonist or antagonist, a peptidomimetic of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 agonist or antagonist, or other small molecule. In one embodiment, the agent stimulates one or more 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activities. Examples of such stimulatory agents include active 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein and a nucleic acid molecule encoding 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 that has been introduced into the cell. In another embodiment, the agent inhibits one or more 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activities. Examples of such inhibitory agents include antisense 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules, anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies, and 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 inhibitors. These modulatory methods can be performed in vitro (e.g., by culturing the cell with the agent) or, alternatively, in vivo (e.g., by administering the agent to a subject). As such, the present invention provides methods of treating an individual afflicted with a disease or disorder characterized by aberrant or unwanted expression or activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or nucleic acid molecule. In one embodiment, the method involves administering an agent (e.g., an agent identified by a screening assay described herein), or combination of agents that modulates (e.g., upregulates or downregulates) 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity. In another embodiment, the method involves administering a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or nucleic acid molecule as therapy to compensate for reduced, aberrant, or unwanted 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity.
Stimulation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is desirable in situations in which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 is abnormally downregulated and/or in which increased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is likely to have a beneficial effect. Likewise, inhibition of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is desirable in situations in which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 is abnormally upregulated and/or in which decreased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is likely to have a beneficial effect.
(i) Methods for Inhibiting Target Gene Expression, Synthesis, or Activity As discussed above, genes involved in cardiovascular disorders may cause such disorders via an increased level of gene activity. In some cases, such up-regulation may have a causative or exacerbating effect on the disease state. A variety of techniques may be used to inhibit the expression, synthesis, or activity of such genes and/or proteins.
For example, compounds such as those identified through assays described above, which exhibit inhibitory activity, may be used in accordance with the invention to ameliorate cardiovascular disease symptoms. Such molecules may include, but are not limited to, small organic molecules, peptides, antibodies, and the like.
For example, compounds can be administered that compete with endogenous ligand for the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. The resulting reduction in the amount of ligand- bound 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein will modulate endothelial cell physiology. Compounds that can be particularly useful for this purpose include, for example, soluble proteins or peptides, such as peptides comprising one or more of the extracellular domains, or portions and/or analogs thereof, of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, including, for example, soluble fusion proteins such as Ig-tailed fusion proteins. (For a discussion of the production of Ig- tailed fusion proteins, see, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,116,964). Alternatively, compounds, such as ligand analogs or antibodies, that bind to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 receptor site, but do not activate the protein, (e.g., receptor-ligand antagonists) can be effective in inhibiting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein activity.
Further, antisense and ribozyme molecules which inhibit expression of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene may also be used in accordance with the invention to inhibit aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene activity. Still further, triple helix molecules may be utilized in inhibiting aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene activity. The antisense nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention are typically administered to a subject or generated in situ such that they hybridize with or bind to cellular mRNA and/or genomic DNA encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein to thereby inhibit expression of the protein, e.g., by inhibiting transcription and/or translation. The hybridization can be by conventional nucleotide complementarity to form a stable duplex, or, for example, in the case of an antisense nucleic acid molecule which binds to DNA duplexes, through specific interactions in the major groove of the double helix. An example of a route of administration of antisense nucleic acid molecules of the invention include direct injection at a tissue site. Alternatively, antisense nucleic acid molecules can be modified to target selected cells and then administered systemically. For example, for systemic administration, antisense molecules can be modified such that they specifically bind to receptors or antigens expressed on a selected cell surface, e.g., by linking the antisense nucleic acid molecules to peptides or antibodies which bind to cell surface receptors or antigens. The antisense nucleic acid molecules can also be delivered to cells using the vectors described herein. To achieve sufficient intracellular concentrations of the antisense molecules, vector constructs in which the antisense nucleic acid molecule is placed under the control of a strong pol II or pol III promoter are preferred.
In yet another embodiment, an antisense nucleic acid molecule used in the methods of the invention is an α-anomeric nucleic acid molecule. An α-anomeric nucleic acid molecule forms specific double-stranded hybrids with complementary RNA in which, contrary to the usual β-units, the strands run parallel to each other (Gaultier et al (1987) Nucleic Acids. Res. 15:6625-6641). The antisense nucleic acid molecule can also comprise a 2'-o-methylribonucleotide (Inoue et al. (1987) Nucleic Acids Res. 15:6131-6148) or a chimeric RNA-DNA analogue (Inoue et al (1987) EE5S Lett. 215:327-330). In still another embodiment, an antisense nucleic acid used in the methods of the invention is a ribozyme. Ribozymes are catalytic RNA molecules with ribonuclease activity which are capable of cleaving a single-stranded nucleic acid, such as an mRNA, to which they have a complementary region. Thus, ribozymes (e.g., hammerhead ribozymes (described in Haselhoff and Gerlach (1988) Nature 334:585-591)) can be used to catalytically cleave 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA transcripts to thereby inhibit translation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA. A ribozyme having specificity for a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding nucleic acid can be designed based upon the nucleotide sequence of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 cDNA disclosed herein (i.e., SEQ ID NO:l, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, or 29). For example, a derivative of a Tetrahymena L-19 INS RΝA can be constructed in which the nucleotide sequence of the active site is complementary to the nucleotide sequence to be cleaved in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding mRΝA (see, for example, Cech et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,987,071; and Cech et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,116,742). Alternatively, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA can be used to select a catalytic RNA having a specific ribonuclease activity from a pool of RNA molecules (see, for example, Bartel, D. and Szostak, J.W. (1993) Science 261:1411-1418).
139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression can also be inhibited by targeting nucleotide sequences complementary to the regulatory region of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 (e.g., the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 promoter and/or enhancers) to form triple helical structures that prevent transcription of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene in target cells (see, for example, Helene, C. (1991) Anticancer Drug Des. 6(6):569-84; Helene, C. et al. (1992) Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 660:27- 36; and Maher, L . (1992) Bioassays 14(12):807-15).
Antibodies that are both specific for the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein and interfere with its activity may also be used to modulate or inhibit 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein function. Such antibodies may be generated using standard techniques described herein, against the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein itself or against peptides corresponding to portions of the protein. Such antibodies include but are not limited to polyclonal, monoclonal, Fab fragments, single chain antibodies, or chimeric antibodies.
In instances where the target gene protein is intracellular and whole antibodies are used, internalizing antibodies may be preferred. Lipofectin liposomes may be used to deliver the antibody or a fragment of the Fab region which binds to the target epitope into cells. Where fragments of the antibody are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment which binds to the target protein's binding domain is preferred. For example, peptides having an amino acid sequence corresponding to the domain of the variable region of the antibody that binds to the target gene protein may be used. Such peptides may be synthesized chemically or produced via recombinant DNA technology using methods well known in the art (described in, for example, Creighton (1983), supra; and Sambrook et al. (1989) supra). Single chain neutralizing antibodies which bind to intracellular target gene epitopes may also be administered. Such single chain antibodies may be administered, for example, by expressing nucleotide sequences encoding single- chain antibodies within the target cell population by utilizing, for example, techniques such as those described in Marasco et al. (1993) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 90:7889- 7893).
In some instances, the target gene protein is extracellular, or is a transmembrane protein, such as the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Antibodies that are specific for one or more extracellular domains of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, for example, and that interfere with its activity, are particularly useful in treating cardiovascular disease. Such antibodies are especially efficient because they can access the target domains directly from the bloodstream. Any of the administration techniques described below which are appropriate for peptide administration may be utilized to effectively administer inhibitory target gene antibodies to their site of action.
(ii) Methods for Restoring or Enhancing Target Gene Activity
Genes that cause cardiovascular disease may be underexpressed within cardiovascular disease situations. Alternatively, the activity of the protein products of such genes may be decreased, leading to the development of cardiovascular disease symptoms. Such down-regulation of gene expression or decrease of protein activity might have a causative or exacerbating effect on the disease state.
In some cases, genes that are up-regulated in the disease state might be exerting a protective effect. A variety of techniques may be used to increase the expression, synthesis, or activity of genes and/or proteins that exert a protective effect in response to cardiovascular disease conditions.
Described in this section are methods whereby the level 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity may be increased to levels wherein cardiovascular disease symptoms are ameliorated. The level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity may be increased, for example, by either increasing the level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene expression or by increasing the level of active 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein which is present.
For example, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, at a level sufficient to ameliorate cardiovascular disease symptoms may be administered to a patient exhibiting such symptoms. Any of the techniques discussed below may be used for such administration. One of skill in the art will readily know how to determine the concentration of effective, non-toxic doses of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, utilizing techniques such as those described below.
Additionally, RNA sequences encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein may be directly administered to a patient exhibiting cardiovascular disease symptoms, at a concentration sufficient to produce a level of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein such that cardiovascular disease symptoms are ameliorated. Any of the techniques discussed below, which achieve intracellular administration of compounds, such as, for example, liposome administration, may be used for the administration of such RNA molecules. The RNA molecules may be produced, for example, by recombinant techniques such as those described herein.
Further, subjects may be treated by gene replacement therapy. One or more copies of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene, or a portion thereof, that directs the production of a normal 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 function, may be inserted into cells using vectors which include, but are not limited to adenovirus, adeno-associated virus, and retrovirus vectors, in addition to other particles that introduce DNA into cells, such as liposomes. Additionally, techniques such as those described above may be used for the introduction of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene sequences into human cells. Cells, preferably, autologous cells, containing 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414,
7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expressing gene sequences may then be introduced or reintroduced into the subject at positions which allow for the amelioration of cardiovascular disease symptoms. Such cell replacement techniques may be preferred, for example, when the gene product is a secreted, extracellular gene product.
C. Pharmaceutical Compositions
Another aspect of the invention pertains to methods for treating a subject suffering from a cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis. These methods involve administering to a subject an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587,
10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity (e.g., an agent identified by a screening assay described herein), or a combination of such agents. In another embodiment, the method involves administering to a subject a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or nucleic acid molecule as therapy to compensate for reduced, aberrant, or unwanted 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 expression or activity.
Stimulation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is desirable in situations in which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 is abnormally downregulated and/or in which increased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is likely to have a beneficial effect. Likewise, inhibition of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is desirable in situations in which 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 is abnormally upregulated and/or in which decreased 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity is likely to have a beneficial effect, e.g., inhibition of atherosclerotic lesion formation.
The agents which modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity can be administered to a subject using pharmaceutical compositions suitable for such administration. Such compositions typically comprise the agent (e.g., nucleic acid molecule, protein, or antibody) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. As used herein the language "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
A pharmaceutical composition used in the therapeutic methods of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral
(e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL™ (BASF, Parsippany, NJ) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyetheylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, and sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the agent that modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity (e.g., a fragment of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, . 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or an anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
For administration by inhalation, the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.
The agents that modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.
In one embodiment, the agents that modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,522,811. It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the agent that modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an agent for the treatment of subjects.
Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such agents can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Agents which exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While agents that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such agents to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects. The data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulating agents lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any agent used in the therapeutic methods of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
As defined herein, a therapeutically effective amount of protein or polypeptide (i.e., an effective dosage) ranges from about 0.001 to 30 mg/kg body weight, preferably about 0.01 to 25 mg/kg body weight, more preferably about 0J to 20 mg/kg body weight, and even more preferably about 1 to 10 mg/kg, 2 to 9 mg/kg, 3 to 8 mg/kg, 4 to 7 mg/kg, or 5 to 6 mg/kg body weight. The skilled artisan will appreciate that certain factors may influence the dosage required to effectively treat a subject, including but not limited to the severity of the disease or disorder, previous treatments, the general health and/or age of the subject, and other diseases present. Moreover, treatment of a subject with a therapeutically effective amount of a protein, polypeptide, or antibody can include a single treatment or, preferably, can include a series of treatments.
In a preferred example, a subject is treated with antibody, protein, or polypeptide in the range of between about 0J to 20 mg/kg body weight, one time per week for between about 1 to 10 weeks, preferably between 2 to 8 weeks, more preferably between about 3 to 7 weeks, and even more preferably for about 4, 5, or 6 weeks. It will also be appreciated that the effective dosage of antibody, protein, or polypeptide used for treatment may increase or decrease over the course of a particular treatment. Changes in dosage may result and become apparent from the results of diagnostic assays as described herein.
The present invention encompasses agents which modulate expression or activity. An agent may, for example, be a small molecule. For example, such small molecules include, but are not limited to, peptides, peptidomimetics, amino acids, amino acid analogs, polynucleotides, polynucleotide analogs, nucleotides, nucleotide analogs, organic or inorganic compounds (i.e,. including heteroorganic and organometallic compounds) having a molecular weight less than about 10,000 grams per mole, organic or inorganic compounds having a molecular weight less than about 5,000 grams per mole, organic or inorganic compounds having a molecular weight less than about 1,000 grams per mole, organic or inorganic compounds having a molecular weight less than about 500 grams per mole, and salts, esters, and other pharmaceutically acceptable forms of such compounds. It is understood that appropriate doses of small molecule agents depends upon a number of factors within the ken of the ordinarily skilled physician, veterinarian, or researcher. The dose(s) of the small molecule will vary, for example, depending upon the identity, size, and condition of the subject or sample being treated, further depending upon the route by which the composition is to be administered, if applicable, and the effect which the practitioner desires the small molecule to have upon the nucleic acid or polypeptide of the invention.
Exemplary doses include milligram or microgram amounts of the small molecule per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g., about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 500 milligrams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 5 milligrams per kilogram, or about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 50 micrograms per kilogram). It is furthermore understood that appropriate doses of a small molecule depend upon the potency of the small molecule with respect to the expression or activity to be modulated. Such appropriate doses may be determined using the assays described herein. When one or more of these small molecules is to be administered to an animal (e.g., a human) in order to modulate expression or activity of a polypeptide or nucleic acid of the invention, a physician, veterinarian, or researcher may, for example, prescribe a relatively low dose at first, subsequently increasing the dose until an appropriate response is obtained. In addition, it is understood that the specific dose level for any particular animal subject will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, gender, and diet of the subject, the time of administration, the route of administration, the rate of excretion, any drug combination, and the degree of expression or activity to be modulated. Further, an antibody (or fragment thereof) may be conjugated to a therapeutic moiety such as a cytotoxin, a therapeutic agent or a radioactive metal ion. A cytotoxin or cytotoxic agent includes any agent that is detrimental to cells. Examples include taxol, cytochalasin B, gramicidin D, ethidium bromide, emetine, mitomycin, etoposide, tenoposide, vincristine, vinblastine, colchicin, doxorubicin, daunorubicin, dihydroxy anthracin dione, mitoxantrone, lnithramycin, actinomycin D, 1-dehydrotestosterone, glucocorticoids, procaine, tetracaine, lidocaine, propranolol, and puromycin and analogs or homologs thereof. Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, antimetabolites (e.g., methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine, 6-thioguanine, cytarabine, 5-fluorouracil decarbazine), alkylating agents (e.g., mechlorethamine, thioepa chlorambucil, melphalan, carmustine (BSNU) and lomustine (CCNU), cyclothosphamide, busulfan, dibromomannitol, streptozotocin, mitomycin C, and cis-dichlorodiamine platinum (II) (DDP) cisplatin), anthracyclines (e.g., daunorubicin (formerly daunomycin) and doxorubicin), antibiotics (e.g., dactinomycin (formerly actinomycin), bleomycin, mithramycin, and anthramycin (AMC)), and anti-mitotic agents (e.g., vincristine and vinblastine).
The conjugates of the invention can be used for modifying a given biological response, the drug moiety is not to be construed as limited to classical chemical therapeutic agents. For example, the drug moiety may be a protein or polypeptide possessing a desired biological activity. Such proteins may include, for example, a toxin such as abrin, ricin A, pseudomonas exotoxin, or diphtheria toxin; a protein such as tumor necrosis factor, alpha- interferon, beta-interferon, nerve growth factor, platelet derived growth factor, tissue plasminogen activator; or biological response modifiers such as, for example, lymphokines, interleukin-1 ("IL-1"), interleuldn-2 ("IL-2"), interleukin-6 ("IL-6"), granulocyte macrophase colony stimulating factor ("GM-CSF"), granulocyte colony stimulating factor ("G-CSF"), or other growth factors.
Techniques for conjugating such therapeutic moiety to antibodies are well known, see, e.g. , Arnon et al. , "Monoclonal Antibodies For Immunotargeting Of Drugs In Cancer Therapy", in Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Reisfeld et al. (eds.), pp. 243- 56 (Alan R. Liss, Inc. 1985); Hellstrom et al, "Antibodies For Drug Delivery", in
Controlled Drug Delivery (2nd Ed.), Robinson et al. (eds.), pp. 623-53 (Marcel Dekker, Inc. 1987); Thorpe, "Antibody Carriers Of Cytotoxic Agents In Cancer Therapy: A Review", in Monoclonal Antibodies '84: Biological And Clinical Applications, Pinchera et al (eds.), pp. 475-506 (1985); "Analysis, Results, And Future Prospective Of The Therapeutic Use Of Radiolabeled Antibody In Cancer Therapy" , in Monoclonal Antibodies For Cancer Detection And Therapy, Baldwin et al. (eds.), pp. 303-16 (Academic Press 1985), and Thorpe et al, "The Preparation And Cytotoxic Properties Of Antibody-Toxin Conjugates", Immunol. Rev., 62:119-58 (1982). Alternatively, an antibody can be conjugated to a second antibody to form an antibody heteroconjugate as described by Segal in U.S. Patent No. 4,676,980.
The nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention can be inserted into vectors and used as gene therapy vectors. Gene therapy vectors can be delivered to a subject by, for example, intravenous injection, local administration (see U.S. Patent 5,328,470) or by stereotactic injection (see, e.g., Chen et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91 :3054-3057). The pharmaceutical preparation of the gene therapy vector can include the gene therapy vector in an acceptable diluent, or can comprise a slow release matrix in which the gene delivery vehicle is imbedded. Alternatively, where the complete gene delivery vector can be produced intact from recombinant cells, e.g., retroviral vectors, the pharmaceutical preparation can include one or more cells which produce the gene delivery system.
D. Pharmacogenomics
In conjunction with the therapeutic methods of the invention, pharmacogenomics (i.e., the study of the relationship between a subject's genotype and that subject's response to a foreign compound or drug) may be considered. Differences in metabolism of therapeutics can lead to severe toxicity or therapeutic failure by altering the relation between dose and blood concentration of the pharmacologically active drug. Thus, a physician or clinician may consider applying knowledge obtained in relevant pharmacogenomics studies in detemiining whether to administer an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity, as well as tailoring the dosage and/or therapeutic regimen of treatment with an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. Pharmacogenomics deals with clinically significant hereditary variations in the response to drugs due to altered drug disposition and abnormal action in affected persons. See, for example, Eichelbaum, M. et al (1996) Clin. Exp. Pharmacol. Physiol. 23(10-11): 983-985 and Linder, M.W. et al. (1997) Clin. Chem. 43(2):254-266. In general, two types of pharmacogenetic conditions can be differentiated. Genetic conditions transmitted as a single factor altering the way drugs act on the body (altered drug action) or genetic conditions transmitted as single factors altering the way the body acts on drugs (altered drug metabolism). These pharmacogenetic conditions can occur either as rare genetic defects or as naturally-occurring polymorphisms. For example, glucose-6-phosphate aminopeptidase deficiency (G6PD) is a common inherited enzymopathy in which the main clinical complication is haemolysis after ingestion of oxidant drugs (anti-malarials, sulfonamides, analgesics, nitrofurans) and consumption of fava beans.
One pharmacogenomics approach to identifying genes that predict drug response, known as "a genome-wide association", relies primarily on a high-resolution map of the human genome consisting of already known gene-related markers (e.g., a "bi-allelic" gene marker map which consists of 60,000-100,000 polymorphic or variable sites on the human genome, each of which has two variants). Such a high-resolution genetic map can be compared to a map of the genome of each of a statistically significant number of patients taking part in a Phase 11/111 drug trial to identify markers associated with a particular observed drug response or side effect. Alternatively, such a high resolution map can be generated from a combination of some ten million known single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) in the human genome. As used herein, a "SNP" is a common alteration that occurs in a single nucleotide base in a stretch of DNA. For example, a SNP may occur once per every 1000 bases of DNA. A SNP may be involved in a disease process, however, the vast majority may not be disease-associated. Given a genetic map based on the occurrence of such SNPs, individuals can be grouped into genetic categories depending on a particular pattern of SNPs in their individual genome. In such a manner, treatment regimens can be tailored to groups of genetically similar individuals, taldng into account traits that may be common among such genetically similar individuals. Alternatively, a method termed the "candidate gene approach" can be utilized to identify genes that predict drug response. According to this method, if a gene that encodes a drug target is known (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein used in the methods of the present invention), all common variants of that gene can be fairly easily identified in the population and it can be determined if having one version of the gene versus another is associated with a particular drug response.
As an illustrative embodiment, the activity of drug metabolizing enzymes is a major determinant of both the intensity and duration of drug action. The discovery of genetic polymorphisms of drug metabolizing enzymes (e.g., N-acetyltransferase 2 (NAT 2) and the cytochrome P450 enzymes CYP2D6 and CYP2C19) has provided an explanation as to why some patients do not obtain the expected drug effects or show exaggerated drug response and serious toxicity after taking the standard and safe dose of a drug. These polymorphisms are expressed in two phenotypes in the population, the extensive metabolizer (EM) and poor metabolizer (PM). The prevalence of PM is different among different populations. For example, the gene coding for CYP2D6 is highly polymorphic and several mutations have been identified in PM, which all lead to the absence of functional CYP2D6. Poor metabolizers of CYP2D6 and CYP2C19 quite frequently experience exaggerated drug response and side effects when they receive standard doses. If a metabolite is the active therapeutic moiety, PM show no therapeutic response, as demonstrated for the analgesic effect of codeine mediated by its CYP2D6-formed metabolite morphine. The other extreme are the so called ultra-rapid metabolizers who do not respond to standard doses. Recently, the molecular basis of ultra-rapid metabolism has been identified to be due to CYP2D6 gene amplification.
Alternatively, a method termed the "gene expression profiling" can be utilized to identify genes that predict drug response. For example, the gene expression of an animal dosed with a drug (e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 molecule or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator used in the methods of the present invention) can give an indication whether gene pathways related to toxicity have been turned on.
Information generated from more than one of the above pharmacogenomics approaches can be used to determine appropriate dosage and treatment regimens for prophylactic or therapeutic treatment of a subject. This knowledge, when applied to dosing or drug selection, can avoid adverse reactions or therapeutic failure and, thus, enhance therapeutic or prophylactic efficiency when treating a subject suffering from a cardiovascular disease, e.g., atherosclerosis, with an agent which modulates 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
N. Recombinant Expression Vectors and Host Cells Used in the Methods of the Invention The methods of the invention (e.g., the screening assays described herein) include the use of vectors, preferably expression vectors, containing a nucleic acid encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein (or a portion thereof). As used herein, the term "vector" refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting another nucleic acid to which it has been linked. One type of vector is a "plasmid", which refers to a circular double stranded DΝA loop into which additional DΝA segments can be ligated. Another type of vector is a viral vector, wherein additional DΝA segments can be ligated into the viral genome. Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are introduced (e.g., bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian vectors). Other vectors (e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors) are integrated into the genome of a host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome. Moreover, certain vectors are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operatively linked. Such vectors are referred to herein as "expression vectors". In general, expression vectors of utility in recombinant DΝA techniques are often in the form of plasmids. In the present specification, "plasmid" and "vector" can be used interchangeably as the plasmid is the most commonly used form of vector. However, the invention is intended to include such other forms of expression vectors, such as viral vectors (e.g., replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses and adeno-associated viruses), which serve equivalent functions. The recombinant expression vectors to be used in the methods of the invention comprise a nucleic acid of the invention in a form suitable for expression of the nucleic acid in a host cell, which means that the recombinant expression vectors include one or more regulatory sequences, selected on the basis of the host cells to be used for expression, which is operatively linked to the nucleic acid sequence to be expressed. Within a recombinant expression vector, "operably linked" is intended to mean that the nucleotide sequence of interest is linked to the regulatory sequence(s) in a manner which allows for expression of the nucleotide sequence (e.g., in an in vitro transcription/translation system or in a host cell when the vector is introduced into the host cell). The term "regulatory sequence" is intended to include promoters, enhancers and other expression control elements (e.g., polyadenylation signals). Such regulatory sequences are described, for example, in Goeddel (1990) Methods Enzymol. 185:3-7. Regulatory sequences include those which direct constitutive expression of a nucleotide sequence in many types of host cells and those which direct expression of the nucleotide sequence only in certain host cells (e.g., tissue-specific regulatory sequences). It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the design of the expression vector can depend on such factors as the choice of the host cell to be transformed, the level of expression of protein desired, and the like. The expression vectors of the invention can be introduced into host cells to thereby produce proteins or peptides, including fusion proteins or peptides, encoded by nucleic acids as described herein (e.g., 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, mutant forms of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, fusion proteins, and the like).
The recombinant expression vectors to be used in the methods of the invention can be designed for expression of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183,
10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins in prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells. For example, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins can be expressed in bacterial cells such as E. coli, insect cells (using baculovirus expression vectors), yeast cells, or mammalian cells. Suitable host cells are discussed further in Goeddel (1990) supra. Alternatively, the recombinant expression vector can be transcribed and translated in vitro, for example using T7 promoter regulatory sequences and T7 polymerase.
Expression of proteins in prokaryotes is most often carried out in E. coli with vectors containing constitutive or inducible promoters directing the expression of either fusion or non-fusion proteins. Fusion vectors add a number of amino acids to a protein encoded therein, usually to the amino terminus of the recombinant protein. Such fusion vectors typically serve three purposes: 1) to increase expression of recombinant protein; 2) to increase the solubility of the recombinant protein; and 3) to aid in the purification of the recombinant protein by acting as a ligand in affinity purification. Often, in fusion expression vectors, a proteolytic cleavage site is introduced at the junction of the fusion moiety and the recombinant protein to enable separation of the recombinant protein from the fusion moiety subsequent to purification of the fusion protein. Such enzymes, and their cognate recognition sequences, include Factor Xa, thrombin and enterokinase. Typical fusion expression vectors include pGEX (Pharmacia Biotech Inc; Smith, D.B. and Johnson, K.S. (1988) Gene 67:31-40), pMAL (New England Biolabs, Beverly, MA) and pRIT5 (Pharmacia, Piscataway, NJ) which fuse glutathione S-transferase (GST), maltose E binding protein, or protein A, respectively, to the target recombinant protein.
Purified fusion proteins can be utilized in 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity assays, (e.g., direct assays or competitive assays described in detail below), or to generate antibodies specific for 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins. In a preferred embodiment, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein expressed in a retroviral expression vector of the present invention can be utilized to infect bone marrow cells which are subsequently transplanted into irradiated recipients. The pathology of the subject recipient is then examined after sufficient time has passed (e.g., six weeks).
In another embodiment, a nucleic acid of the invention is expressed in mammalian cells using a mammalian expression vector. Examples of mammalian expression vectors include pCDM8 (Seed, B. (1987) Nature 329:840) and pMT2PC (Kaufman et al. (1987) EMBO J. 6:187-195). When used in mammalian cells, the expression vector's control functions are often provided by viral regulatory elements. For example, commonly used promoters are derived from polyoma, Adenovirus 2, cytornegalovirus and Simian Virus 40. For other suitable expression systems for both prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells see chapters 16 and 17 of Sambrook, J. et al, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual 2nd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 1989. In another embodiment, the recombinant mammalian expression vector is capable of directing expression of the nucleic acid preferentially in a particular cell type (e.g., tissue-specific regulatory elements are used to express the nucleic acid).
The methods of the invention may further use a recombinant expression vector comprising a DNA molecule of the invention cloned into the expression vector in an antisense orientation. That is, the DNA molecule is operatively linked to a regulatory sequence in a manner which allows for expression (by transcription of the DNA molecule) of an RNA molecule which is antisense to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA. Regulatory sequences operatively linked to a nucleic acid cloned in the antisense orientation can be chosen which direct the continuous expression of the antisense RNA molecule in a variety of cell types, for instance viral promoters and/or enhancers, or regulatory sequences can be chosen which direct constitutive, tissue specific, or cell type specific expression of antisense RNA. The antisense expression vector can be in the form of a recombinant plasmid, phagemid, or attenuated virus in which antisense nucleic acids are produced under the control of a high efficiency regulatory region, the activity of which can be determined by the cell type into which the vector is introduced. For a discussion of the regulation of gene expression using antisense genes, see Weintraub, H. et al, Antisense RNA as a molecular tool for genetic analysis, Reviews - Trends in Genetics, Vol. 1(1) 1986. Another aspect of the invention pertains to the use of host cells into which a 139,
258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecule of the invention is introduced, e.g., a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecule within a recombinant expression vector or a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecule containing sequences which allow it to homologously recombine into a specific site of the host cell's genome. The terms "host cell" and "recombinant host cell" are used interchangeably herein. It is understood that such terms refer not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny or potential progeny of such a cell. Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included within the scope of the term as used herein.
A host cell can be any prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell. For example, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be expressed in bacterial cells such as E. coli, insect cells, yeast or mammalian cells (such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO) or COS cells). Other suitable host cells are known to those skilled in the art.
Vector DNA can be introduced into prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells via conventional transformation or transfection techniques. As used herein, the terms "transformation" and "transfection" are intended to refer to a variety of art-recognized techniques for introducing foreign nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) into a host cell, including calcium phosphate or calcium chloride co-precipitation, DΕAΕ-dextran-mediated transfection, lipofection, or electroporation. Suitable methods for transforming or transfecting host cells can be found in Sambrook et al. (Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 1989), and other laboratory manuals.
A host cell used in the methods of the invention, such as a prokaryotic or eukaryotic host cell in culture, can be used to produce (i.e., express) a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Accordingly, the invention further provides methods for producing a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein using the host cells of the invention. In one embodiment, the method comprises culturing the host cell of the invention (into which a recombinant expression vector encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein has been introduced) in a suitable medium such that a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein is produced. In another embodiment, the method further comprises isolating a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921 , 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein from the medium or the host cell.
VI. Isolated Nucleic Acid Molecules Used in the Methods of the Invention
The methods of the invention include the use of isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins or biologically active portions thereof, as well as nucleic acid fragments sufficient for use as hybridization probes to identify 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding nucleic acid molecules (e.g., 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA) and fragments for use as PCR primers for the amplification or mutation of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules. As used herein, the term "nucleic acid molecule" is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) and RNA molecules (e.g., mRNA) and analogs of the DNA or RNA generated using nucleotide analogs. The nucleic acid molecule can be single- stranded or double-stranded, but preferably is double-stranded DNA.
A nucleic acid molecule used in the methods of the present invention, e.g., a nucleic acid molecule having the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion thereof, can be isolated using standard molecular biology techniques and the sequence information provided herein. Using all or portion of the nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, as a hybridization probe, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules can be isolated using standard hybridization and cloning techniques (e.g., as described in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, 1989).
Moreover, a nucleic acid molecule encompassing all or a portion of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29 can be isolated by the polymerase chain reaction ■ (PCR) using synthetic oligonucleotide primers designed based upon the sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29.
A nucleic acid used in the methods of the invention can be amplified using cDNA, mRNA or, alternatively, genomic DNA as a template and appropriate oligonucleotide primers according to standard PCR amplification techniques. Furthermore, oligonucleotides corresponding to 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleotide sequences can be prepared by standard synthetic techniques, e.g., using an automated DNA synthesizer.
In a preferred embodiment, the isolated nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention comprise the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, a complement of the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion of any of these nucleotide sequences. A nucleic acid molecule which is complementary to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ JO 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, is one which is sufficiently complementary to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29 such that it can hybridize to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29 thereby forming a stable duplex.
In still another preferred embodiment, an isolated nucleic acid molecule used in the methods of the present invention comprises a nucleotide sequence which is at least about 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to the entire length of the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion of any of this nucleotide sequence.
Moreover, the nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention can comprise only a portion of the nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, , for example, a fragment which can be used as a probe or primer or a fragment encoding a portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, e.g., a biologically active portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. The probe/primer typically comprises substantially purified oligonucleotide. The oligonucleotide typically comprises a region of nucleotide sequence that hybridizes under stringent conditions to at least about 12 or 15, preferably about 20 or 25, more preferably about 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, or 75 consecutive nucleotides of a sense sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, of an anti-sense sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or of a naturally occurring allelic variant or mutant of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, . In one embodiment, a nucleic acid molecule used in the methods of the present invention comprises a nucleotide sequence which is greater than 100, 100- 200, 200-300, 300-400, 400-500, 500-600, 600-700, 700-800, 800-900, 900-1000, 1000- 1100, 1100-1200, 1200-1300, or more nucleotides in length and hybridizes under stringent hybridization conditions to a nucleic acid molecule of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, .
As used herein, the term "hybridizes under stringent conditions" is intended to describe conditions for hybridization and washing under which nucleotide sequences that are significantly identical or homologous to each other remain hybridized to each other. Preferably, the conditions are such that sequences at least about 70%, more preferably at least about 80%, even more preferably at least about 85% or 90% identical to each other remain hybridized to each other. Such stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Ausubel et al, eds., John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (1995), sections 2, 4 and 6. Additional stringent conditions can be found in Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Sambrook et al, Cold Spring Harbor Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY (1989), chapters 7, 9 and 11. A preferred, non- limiting example of stringent hybridization conditions includes hybridization in 4X sodium chloride/sodium citrate (SSC), at about 65-70°C (or hybridization in 4X SSC plus 50% formamide at about 42-50°C) followed by one or more washes in IX SSC, at about 65-70° C. A preferred, non-limiting example of highly stringent hybridization conditions includes hybridization in IX SSC, at about 65-70°C (or hybridization in IX SSC plus 50% formamide at about 42-50°C) followed by one or more washes in 0.3X SSC, at about 65- 70°C. A preferred, non-limiting example of reduced stringency hybridization conditions includes hybridization in 4X SSC, at about 50-60°C (or alternatively hybridization in 6X SSC plus 50% formamide at about 40-45°C) followed by one or more washes in 2X SSC, at about 50-60°C. Ranges intermediate to the above-recited values, e.g., at 65-70°C or at 42-50°C are also intended to be encompassed by the present invention. SSPE (lxSSPE is 0.15M NaCl, lOmM NaH2PO4, and 1.25mM EDTA, pH 7.4) can be substituted for SSC (lxSSC is 0J5M NaCl and 15mM sodium citrate) in the hybridization and wash buffers; washes are performed for 15 minutes each after hybridization is complete. The hybridization temperature for hybrids anticipated to be less than 50 base pairs in length . should be 5-10°C less than the melting temperature (Tm) of the hybrid, where Tm is determined according to the following equations. For hybrids less than 18 base pairs in length, Tm(°C) = 2(# of A + T bases) + 4(# of G + C bases). For hybrids between 18 and 49 base pairs in length, Tm(°C) = 81.5 + 16.6(log10[Na+]) + 0.41(%G+C) - (600/N), where N is the number of bases in the hybrid, and [Na+] is the concentration of sodium ions in the hybridization buffer ([Na+] for lxSSC = 0J65 M). It will also be recognized by the skilled practitioner that additional reagents may be added to hybridization and/or wash buffers to decrease non-specific hybridization of nucleic acid molecules to membranes, for example, nitrocellulose or nylon membranes, including but not limited to blocking agents (e.g., BSA or salmon or herring sperm carrier DNA), detergents (e.g., SDS), chelating agents (e.g., EDTA), Ficoll, PVP and the like. When using nylon membranes, in particular, an additional preferred, non-limiting example of stringent hybridization conditions is hybridization in 0.25-0.5M NaH2PO4, 7% SDS at about 65°C, followed by one or more washes at 0.02M NaH2PO4, 1% SDS at 65°C, see e.g., Church and Gilbert (1984) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81:1991-1995, (or alternatively 0.2X SSC, 1% SDS). In preferred embodiments, the probe further comprises a label group attached thereto, e.g., the label group can be a radioisotope, a fluorescent compound, an enzyme, or an enzyme co-factor. Such probes can be used as a part of a diagnostic test ldt for identifying cells or tissue which misexpress a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, such as by measuring a level of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -encoding nucleic acid in a sample of cells from a subject e.g., detecting 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA levels or determining whether a genomic 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene has been mutated or deleted.
The methods of the invention further encompass the use of nucleic acid molecules that differ from the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, due to degeneracy of the genetic code and thus encode the same 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins as those encoded by the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, . In another embodiment, an isolated nucleic acid molecule included in the methods of the invention has a nucleotide sequence encoding a protein having an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30.
The methods of the invention further include the use of allelic variants of human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 , e.g., functional and non-functional allelic variants. Functional allelic variants are naturally occurring amino acid sequence variants of the human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein that maintain a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. Functional allelic variants will typically contain only conservative substitution of one or more amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, or substitution, deletion or insertion , of non-critical residues in non-critical regions of the protein.
Non-functional allelic variants are naturally occurring amino acid sequence variants of the human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein that do not have a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. Non-functional allelic variants will typically contain a non-conservative substitution, deletion, or insertion or premature truncation of the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, or a substitution, insertion or deletion in critical residues or critical regions of the protein. The methods of the present invention may further use non-human orthologues of the human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Orthologues of the human 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein are proteins that are isolated from non-human organisms and possess the same 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity.
The methods of the present invention further include the use of nucleic acid molecules comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, or a portion thereof, in which a mutation has been introduced. The mutation may lead to amino acid substitutions at "non-essential" amino acid residues or at "essential" amino acid residues. A "non-essential" amino acid residue is a residue that can be altered from the wild-type sequence of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 (e.g., the sequence of SEQ ID NO:2) without altering the biological activity, whereas an "essential" amino acid residue is required for biological activity. For example, amino acid residues that are conserved among the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins of the present invention and other members of the family are not likely to be amenable to alteration.
Mutations can be introduced into SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis. Preferably, conservative amino acid substitutions are made at one or more predicted non-essential amino acid residues. A "conservative amino acid substitution" is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine), nonpolar side chains (e.g., glycine, alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta-branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine). Thus, a predicted nonessential amino acid residue in a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein is preferably replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family. Alternatively, in another embodiment, mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity. Following mutagenesis of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the protein can be determined using the assay described herein.
Another aspect of the invention pertains to the use of isolated nucleic acid molecules which are antisense to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, . An "antisense" nucleic acid comprises a nucleotide sequence which is complementary to a "sense" nucleic acid encoding a protein, e.g., complementary to the coding strand of a double-stranded cDNA molecule or complementary to an mRNA sequence. Accordingly, an antisense nucleic acid can hydrogen bond to a sense nucleic acid. The antisense nucleic acid can be complementary to an entire 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 coding strand, or to only a portion thereof. In one embodiment, an antisense nucleic acid molecule is antisense to a "coding region" of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequence encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 . The term "coding region" refers to the region of the nucleotide sequence comprising codons which are translated into amino acid residues. In another embodiment, the antisense nucleic acid molecule is antisense to a "noncoding region" of the coding strand of a nucleotide sequence encoding 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 . The term "noncoding region" refers to 5' and 3' sequences which flank the coding region that are not translated into amino acids (also referred to as 5' and 3' untranslated regions).
Given the coding strand sequences encoding 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 disclosed herein, antisense nucleic acids of the invention can be designed according to the rules of Watson and Crick base pairing. The antisense nucleic acid molecule can be complementary to the entire coding region of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA, but more preferably is an oligonucleotide which is antisense to only a portion of the coding or noncoding region of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA. For example, the antisense oligonucleotide can be complementary to the region surrounding the translation start site of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 mRNA. An antisense oligonucleotide can be, for example, about 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 or 50 nucleotides in length. An antisense nucleic acid of the invention can be constructed using chemical synthesis and enzymatic ligation reactions using procedures known in the art. For example, an antisense nucleic acid (e.g., an antisense oligonucleotide) can be chemically synthesized using naturally occurring nucleotides or variously modified nucleotides designed to increase the biological stability of the molecules or to increase the physical stability of the duplex formed between the antisense and sense nucleic acids, e.g., phosphorothioate derivatives and acridine substituted nucleotides can be used. Examples of modified nucleotides which can be used to generate the antisense nucleic acid include 5- fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-chlorouracil, 5-iodouracil, hypoxanthine, xantine, 4- acetylcytosine, 5-(carboxyhydroxylmethyl) uracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2- thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluracil, dihydrouracil, beta-D- galactosylqueosine, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1 -methyl guanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methylguanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5- methylcytosine, N6-adenine, 7-methylguanine, 5-methylaminomethyluracil, 5- methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, beta-D-mannosylqueosine, 5 - methoxycarboxymethyluracil, 5-methoxyuracil, 2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyladenine, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), wybutoxosine, pseudouracil, queosine, 2-thiocytosine, 5- methyl-2-thiouracil, 2-thiouracil, 4-thiouracil, 5-methyluracil, uracil-5- oxyacetic acid methylester, uracil-5-oxyacetic acid (v), 5-methyl-2-thiouracil, 3-(3-amino-3-N-2- carboxypropyl) uracil, (acp3)w, and 2,6-diaminopurine. Alternatively, the antisense nucleic acid can be produced biologically using an expression vector into which a nucleic acid has been subcloned in an antisense orientation (i.e., RNA transcribed from the inserted nucleic acid will be of an antisense orientation to a target nucleic acid of interest). Antisense nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the invention are further described above, in section IV. In yet another embodiment, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules used in the methods of the present invention can be modified at the base moiety, sugar moiety or phosphate backbone to improve, e.g., the stability, hybridization, or solubility of the molecule. For example, the deoxyribose phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid molecules can be modified to generate peptide nucleic acids (see Hyrup B. et al. (1996) Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 4 (1): 5-23). As used herein, the terms "peptide nucleic acids" or "PNAs" refer to nucleic acid mimics, e.g., DNA mimics, in which the deoxyribose phosphate backbone is replaced by a pseudopeptide backbone and only the four natural nucleobases are retained. The neutral backbone of PNAs has been shown to allow for specific hybridization to DNA and RNA under conditions of low ionic strength. The synthesis of PNA oligomers can be performed using standard solid phase peptide synthesis protocols as described in Hyrup B. et al. (1996) supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al. (1996) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 93:14670-675. PNAs of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680,
17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules can be used in the therapeutic and diagnostic applications described herein. For example, PNAs can be used as antisense or antigene agents for sequence-specific modulation of gene expression by, for example, inducing transcription or translation arrest or inhibiting replication. PNAs of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules can also be used in the analysis of single base pair mutations in a gene, (e.g., by PNA-directed PCR clamping); as 'artificial restriction enzymes' when used in combination with other enzymes, (e.g., SI nucleases (Hyrup B. et al (1996) supra)); or as probes or primers for DNA sequencing or hybridization (Hyrup B. et al. (1996) supra; Perry-O'Keefe et al (1996) supra).
In another embodiment, PNAs of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be modified, (e.g., to enhance their stability or cellular uptake), by attaching lipophilic or other helper groups to PNA, by the formation of PNA-DNA chimeras, or by the use of liposomes or other techniques of drug delivery known in the art. For example, PNA-DNA chimeras of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid molecules can be generated which may combine the advantageous properties of PNA and DNA. Such chimeras allow DNA recognition enzymes, (e.g., RNAse H and DNA polymerases), to interact with the DNA portion while the PNA portion would provide high binding affinity and specificity. PNA-DNA chimeras can be linked using linkers of appropriate lengths selected in terms of base stacking, number of bonds between the nucleobases, and orientation (Hyrup B. et al. (1996) supra). The synthesis of PNA- DNA chimeras can be performed as described in Hyrup B. et al. (1996) supra and Finn P.J. et al. (1996) Nucleic Acids Res. 24 (17): 3357-63. For example, a DNA chain can be synthesized on a solid support using standard phosphoramidite coupling chemistry and modified nucleoside analogs, e.g., 5 '-(4-methoxytrityl)amino-5'-deoxy-thymidine phosphoramidite, can be used as a between the PNA and the 5' end of DNA (Mag, M. et al. (1989) Nucleic Acid Res. 17: 5973-88). PNA monomers are then coupled in a stepwise manner to produce a chimeric molecule with a 5' PNA segment and a 3' DNA segment (Finn P.J. et al. (1996) supra). Alternatively, chimeric molecules can be synthesized with a 5' DNA segment and a 3' PNA segment (Peterser, K.H. et al (1975) Bioorganic Med. Chem. Lett. 5: 1119-11124).
In other embodiments, the oligonucleotide used in the methods of the invention may include other appended groups such as peptides (e.g., for targeting host cell receptors in vivo), or agents facilitating transport across the cell membrane (see, e.g., Letsinger et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:6553-6556; Lemaitre et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:648-652; PCT Publication No. W088/09810) or the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., PCT Publication No. W089/10134). In addition, oligonucleotides can be modified with hybridization-triggered cleavage agents (See, e.g., Krol et al. (1988) Bio-Techniques 6:958-976) or intercalating agents. (See, e.g., Zon (1988) Pharm. Res. 5:539-549). To this end, the oligonucleotide may be conjugated to another molecule, (e.g., a peptide, hybridization triggered cross-linking agent, transport agent, or hybridization-triggered cleavage agent).
NIL Isolated 139. 258. 1261, 1486, 2398. 2414. 7660, 8587, 10183. 10550. 12680. 17921, 32248. 60489 or 93804 Proteins and Anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660. 8587, 10183, 10550. 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 Antibodies Used in the Methods of the Invention The methods of the invention include the use of isolated 139, 258, 1261, 1486,
2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, and biologically active portions thereof, as well as polypeptide fragments suitable for use as immunogens to raise anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies. In one embodiment, native 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins can be isolated from cells or tissue sources by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques. In another embodiment, 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins are produced by recombinant DNA techniques. Alternative to recombinant expression, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or polypeptide can be synthesized chemically using standard peptide synthesis techniques.
As used herein, a "biologically active portion" of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein includes a fragment of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein having a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. Biologically active portions of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein include peptides comprising amino acid sequences sufficiently identical to or derived from the amino acid sequence of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, e.g., the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2, which include fewer amino acids than the full length 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins, and exhibit at least one activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Typically, biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein (e.g., the N-terminal region of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein that is believed to be involved in the regulation of apoptotic activity). A biologically active portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be a polypeptide which is, for example, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300 or more amino acids in length. Biologically active portions of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be used as targets for developing agents which modulate a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 activity. In a preferred embodiment, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein used in the methods of the invention has an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2. In other embodiments, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein is substantially identical to SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, and retains the functional activity of the protein of SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, yet differs in amino acid sequence due to natural allelic variation or mutagenesis, as described in detail in subsection V above. Accordingly, in another embodiment, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein used in the methods of the invention is a protein which comprises an amino acid sequence at least about 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or more identical to SEQ ID NO:2.
To determine the percent identity of two amino acid sequences or of two nucleic acid sequences, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in one or both of a first and a second amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment and non-identical sequences can be disregarded for comparison purposes). In a preferred embodiment, the length of a reference sequence aligned for comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, or 90% of the length of the reference sequence (e.g., when aligning a second sequence to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 having 500 amino acid residues, at least 75, preferably at least 150, more preferably at least 225, even more preferably at least 300, and even more preferably at least 400 or more amino acid residues are aligned). The amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are identical at that position (as used herein amino acid or nucleic acid "identity" is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid "homology"). The percent identity between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences, taking into account the number of gaps, and the length of each gap, which need to be introduced for optimal alignment of the two sequences. The comparison of sequences and determination of percent identity between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm. In a preferred embodiment, the percent identity between two amino acid sequences is determined using the Needleman and Wunsch (/. Mol. Biol. 48:444-453 (1970)) algorithm which has been incorporated into the GAP program in the GCG software package (available at http://www.gcg.com), using either a Blosum 62 matrix or a PAM250 matrix, and a gap weight of 16, 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, or 4 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In yet another preferred embodiment, the percent identity between two nucleotide sequences is determined using the GAP program in the GCG software package (available at http://www.gcg.com), using a NWSgapdna.CMP matrix and a gap weight of 40, 50, 60, 70, or 80 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In another embodiment, the percent identity between two amino acid or nucleotide sequences is determined using the algorithm of E. Meyers and W. Miller (Comput. Appl. Biosci. 4:11-17 (1988)) which has been incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0 or 2.0U), using a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12 and a gap penalty of 4.
The methods of the invention may also use 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 chimeric or fusion proteins. As used herein, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 "chimeric protein" or "fusion protein" comprises a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide operatively linked to a non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide. An "139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide" refers to a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence corresponding to a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 molecule, whereas a "non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide" refers to a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence corresponding to a protein which is not substantially homologous to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, e.g., a protein which is different from the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein and which is derived from the same or a different organism. Within a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide can correspond to all or a portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. In a preferred embodiment, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein comprises at least one biologically active portion of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. In another preferred embodiment, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein comprises at least two biologically active portions of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Within the fusion protein, the term "operatively linked" is intended to indicate that the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide and the non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide are fused in-frame to each other. The non-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide can be fused to the N-terminus or C-terminus of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide.
For example, in one embodiment, the fusion protein is a GST-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion protein in which the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences. Such fusion proteins can facilitate the purification of recombinant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
In another embodiment, this fusion protein is a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein containing a heterologous signal sequence at its N-terminus. In certain host cells (e.g., mammalian host cells), expression and/or secretion of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be increased through use of a heterologous signal sequence.
The 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion proteins used in the methods of the invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions and administered to a subject in vivo. The 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion proteins can be used to affect the bioavailability of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate. Use of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fusion proteins may be useful therapeutically for the treatment of disorders caused by, for example, (i) aberrant modification or mutation of a gene encoding a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein; (ii) mis-regulation of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 gene; and (iii) aberrant post-translational modification of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
Moreover, the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -fusion proteins used in the methods of the invention can be used as immunogens to produce anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies in a subject, to purify 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 ligands and in screening assays to identify molecules which inhibit the interaction of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 substrate.
Preferably, a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 chimeric or fusion protein used in the methods of the invention is produced by standard recombinant DNA techniques. For example, DNA fragments coding for the different polypeptide sequences are ligated together in-frame in accordance with conventional techniques, for example by employing blunt-ended or stagger-ended termini for ligation, restriction enzyme digestion to provide for appropriate termini, filling-in of cohesive ends as appropriate, alkaline phosphatase treatment to avoid undesirable joining, and enzymatic ligation. In another embodiment, the fusion gene can be synthesized by conventional techniques including automated DNA synthesizers. Alternatively, PCR amplification of gene fragments can be carried out using anchor primers which give rise to complementary overhangs between two consecutive gene fragments which can subsequently be annealed and reamplified to generate a chimeric gene sequence (see, for example, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, eds. Ausubel et al. John Wiley & Sons: 1992). Moreover, many expression vectors are commercially available that already encode a fusion moiety (e.g., a GST polypeptide). A 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 - encoding nucleic acid can be cloned into such an expression vector such that the fusion moiety is linked in-frame to the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
The present invention also pertains to the use of variants of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins which function as either 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 agonists (mimetics) or as 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antagonists. Variants of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins can be generated by mutagenesis, e.g., discrete point mutation or truncation of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. An agonist of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or
93804 proteins can retain substantially the same, or a subset, of the biological activities of the naturally occurring form of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. An antagonist of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can inhibit one or more of the activities of the naturally occurring form of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein by, for example, competitively modulating a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 -mediated activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Thus, specific biological effects can be elicited by treatment with a variant of limited function. In one embodiment, treatment of a subject with a variant having a subset of the biological activities of the naturally occurring form of the protein has fewer side effects in a subject relative to treatment with the naturally occurring form of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein.
In one embodiment, variants of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein which function as either 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 agonists (mimetics) or as 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antagonists can be identified by screening combinatorial libraries of mutants, e.g., truncation mutants, of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein for 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein agonist or antagonist activity. In one embodiment, a variegated library of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 variants is generated by combinatorial mutagenesis at the nucleic acid level and is encoded by a variegated gene library. A variegated library of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 variants can be produced by, for example, enzymatically ligating a mixture of synthetic oligonucleotides into gene sequences such that a degenerate set of potential 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences is expressible as individual polypeptides, or alternatively, as a set of larger fusion proteins (e.g., for phage display) containing the set of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences therein. There are a variety of methods which can be used to produce libraries of potential 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 variants from a degenerate oligonucleotide sequence. Chemical synthesis of a degenerate gene sequence can be performed in an automatic DNA synthesizer, and the synthetic gene then ligated into an appropriate expression vector. Use of a degenerate set of genes allows for the provision, in one mixture, of all of the sequences encoding the desired set of potential 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 sequences. Methods for synthesizing degenerate oligonucleotides are known in the art (see, e.g., Narang, S.A. (1983) Tetrahedron 39:3; Itakura et al (1984) Annu. Rev. Biochem. 53:323; Itakura et al. (1984) Science 198:1056; Ike et αZ. (1983) Nucleic Acid Res. 11:477).
In addition, libraries of fragments of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein coding sequence can be used to generate a variegated population of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 fragments for screening and subsequent selection of variants of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. In one embodiment, a library of coding sequence fragments can be generated by treating a double stranded PCR fragment of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 coding sequence with a nuclease under conditions wherein nicldng occurs only about once per molecule, denaturing the double stranded DNA, renaturing the DNA to form double stranded DNA which can include sense/antisense pairs from different nicked products, removing single stranded portions from reformed duplexes by treatment with SI nuclease, and ligating the resulting fragment library into an expression vector. By this method, an expression library can be derived which encodes N- terminal, C-terminal and internal fragments of various sizes of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Several techniques are known in the art for screening gene products of combinatorial libraries made by point mutations or truncation, and for screening cDNA libraries for gene products having a selected property. Such techniques are adaptable for rapid screening of the gene libraries generated by the combinatorial mutagenesis of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 proteins. The most widely used techniques, which are amenable to high through- put analysis, for screening large gene libraries typically include cloning the gene library into replicable expression vectors, transforming appropriate cells with the resulting library of vectors, and expressing the combinatorial genes under conditions in which detection of a desired activity facilitates isolation of the vector encoding the gene whose product was detected. Recursive ensemble mutagenesis (REM), a new technique which enhances the frequency of functional mutants in the libraries, can be used in combination with the screening assays to identify 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 variants (Arkin and Yourvan (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:7811-7815; Delgrave et al. (1993) Protein Engineering 6(3):327-331). The methods of the present invention further include the use of anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies. An isolated 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein, or a portion or fragment thereof, can be used as an immunogen to generate antibodies that bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 using standard techniques for polyclonal and monoclonal antibody preparation. A full-length 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein can be used or, alternatively, antigenic peptide fragments of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be used as immunogens. The antigenic peptide of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 comprises at least 8 amino acid residues of the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: NO:2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30 and encompasses an epitope of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 such that an antibody raised against the peptide forms a specific immune complex with the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Preferably, the antigenic peptide comprises at least 10 amino acid residues, more preferably at least 15 amino acid residues, even more preferably at least 20 amino acid residues, and most preferably at least 30 amino acid residues. Preferred epitopes encompassed by the antigenic peptide are regions of 139, 258,
1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 that are located on the surface of the protein, e.g., hydrophilic regions, as well as regions with high antigenicity.
A 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 immunogen is typically used to prepare antibodies by immunizing a suitable subject, (e.g., rabbit, goat, mouse, or other mammal) with the immunogen. An appropriate immunogenic preparation can contain, for example, recombinantly expressed 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein or a chemically synthesized 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide. The preparation can further include an adjuvant, such as Freund's complete or incomplete adjuvant, or similar immunostimulatory agent. Immunization of a suitable subject with an immunogenic 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 preparation induces a polyclonal anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody response.
The term "antibody" as used herein refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen binding site which specifically binds (immunoreacts with) an antigen, such as a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 . Examples of immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules include F(ab) and F(ab')2 fragments which can be generated by treating the antibody with an enzyme such as pepsin. The invention provides polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies that bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 molecules. The term "monoclonal antibody" or "monoclonal antibody composition", as used herein, refers to a population of antibody molecules that contain only one species of an antigen binding site capable of immunoreacting with a particular epitope of 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 . A monoclonal antibody composition thus typically displays a single binding affinity for a particular 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein with which it immunoreacts.
Polyclonal anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies can be prepared as described above by immunizing a suitable subject with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 immunogen. The anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody titer in the immunized subject can be monitored over time by standard techniques, such as with an enzyme linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) using immobilized 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 . If desired, the antibody molecules directed against 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 can be isolated from the mammal (e.g., from the blood) and further purified by well known techniques, such as protein A chromatography to obtain the IgG fraction. At an appropriate time after immunization, e.g., when the anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody titers are highest, antibody-producing cells can be obtained from the subject and used to prepare monoclonal antibodies by standard techniques, such as the hybridoma technique originally described by Kohler and Milstein (1975) Nature 256:495-497) (see also, Brown et al.
(1981) /. Immunol 127:539-46; Brown et al. (1980) J. Biol. Chem. 255:4980-83; Yeh et al. (1976) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 76:2927-31; and Yeh et al. (1982) Int. J. Cancer 29:269-75), the more recent human B cell hybridoma technique (Kozbor et al. (1983) Immunol Today 4:72), the EBN-hybridoma technique (Cole et al. (1985) Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, Inc., pp. 77-96) or trioma techniques. The technology for producing monoclonal antibody hybridomas is well known (see generally Kenneth, R. H. in Monoclonal Antibodies: A New Dimension In Biological Analyses, Plenum Publishing Corp., New York, New York (1980); Lerner, E. A. (1981) Yale J. Biol. Med. 54:387-402; Gefter, M. L. et al (1977) Somatic Cell Genet. 3:231-36). Briefly, an immortal cell line (typically a myeloma) is fused to lymphocytes (typically splenocytes) from a mammal immunized with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 immunogen as described above, and the culture supernatants of the resulting hybridoma cells are screened to identify a hybridoma producing a monoclonal antibody that binds 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 .
Any of the many well known protocols used for fusing lymphocytes and immortalized cell lines can be applied for the purpose of generating an anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 monoclonal antibody (see, e.g., G. Galfre et al. (1977) Nature 266:55052; Gefter et al. (1977) supra; Lerner (1981) supra; and Kenneth (1980) supra). Moreover, the ordinarily skilled worker will appreciate that there are many variations of such methods which also would be useful. Typically, the immortal cell line (e.g., a myeloma cell line) is derived from the same mammalian species as the lymphocytes. For example, murine hybridomas can be made by fusing lymphocytes from a mouse immunized with an immunogenic preparation of the present invention with an immortalized mouse cell line. Preferred immortal cell lines are mouse myeloma cell lines that are sensitive to culture medium containing hypoxanthine, aminopterin and thymidine ("HAT medium"). Any of a number of myeloma cell lines can be used as a fusion partner according to standard techniques, e.g., the P3-NSl/l-Ag4-l, P3-x63-Ag8.653 or Sp2/O-Agl4 myeloma lines. These myeloma lines are available from ATCC. Typically, HAT-sensitive mouse myeloma cells are fused to mouse splenocytes using polyethylene glycol ("PEG"). Hybridoma cells resulting from the fusion are then selected using HAT medium, which kills unfused and unproductively fused myeloma cells (unfused splenocytes die after several days because they are not transformed). Hybridoma cells producing a monoclonal antibody of the invention are detected by screening the hybridoma culture supernatants for antibodies that bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 , e.g., using a standard ELISA assay.
Alternative to preparing monoclonal antibody-secreting hybridomas, a monoclonal anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody can be identified and isolated by screening a recombinant combinatorial immunoglobulin library (e.g., an antibody phage display library) with 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 to thereby isolate immunoglobulin library members that bind 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 . Kits for generating and screening phage display libraries are commercially available (e.g., the Pharmacia Recombinant Phage Antibody System, Catalog No. 27-9400-01 ; and the Stratagene SurfZAP™ Phage Display Kit, Catalog No. 240612). Additionally, examples of methods and reagents particularly amenable for use in generating and screening antibody display library can be found in, for example, Ladner et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,223,409; Kang et al. PCT International Publication No. WO 92/18619; Dower et al. PCT International Publication No. WO 91/17271; Winter et al. PCT International Publication WO 92/20791; Markland et al. PCT International Publication No. WO 92/15679; Breitling et al. PCT International Publication WO 93/01288; McCafferty et al. PCT International Publication No. WO 92/01047; Garrard et al. PCT International Publication No. WO 92/09690; Ladner et al. PCT Intemational Publication No. WO 90/02809; Fuchs et al. (1991) Bio/Technology 9:1370-1372; Hay et al. (1992) Hum. Antibod. Hybridomas 3:81- 85; Huse et al. (1989) Science 246:1275-1281; Griffiths et al. (1993) EMBO J 12:725-734; Hawkins et al (1992) . Mol. Biol. 226:889-896; Clarkson et al. (1991) Nature 352:624- 628; Gram et al. (1992) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 89:3576-3580; Garrad et al. (1991) Bio/Technology 9:1373-1377; Hoogenboom et al. (1991) Nuc. Acid Res. 19:4133-4137; Barbas et al. (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:7978-7982; and McCafferty et al. (1990) Nature 348:552-554. Additionally, recombinant anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587,
10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies, such as chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies, comprising both human and non-human portions, which can be made using standard recombinant DNA techniques, are within the scope of the methods of the invention. Such chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies can be produced by recombinant DNA techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in Robinson et al. International Application No. PCT/US 86/02269; Aldra, et al. European Patent Application 184,187; Taniguchi, M., European Patent Application 171,496; Morrison et al. European Patent Application 173,494; Neuberger et al. PCT International Publication No. WO 86/01533; Cabilly et al. U.S. Patent No. 4,816,567; Cabilly et al. European Patent Application 125,023; Better et al. (1988) Science 240: 1041- 1043; Liu et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:3439-3443; Liu et al. (1987) J. Immunol. 139:3521-3526; Sun et al. (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:214-218; Nishimura et al. (1987) Cane. Res. 47:999-1005; Wood et al. (1985) Nature 314:446-449; Shaw et al. (1988) J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 80:1553-1559; Morrison, S. L. (1985) Science 229:1202-1207; Oi et al. (1986) BioTechniques 4:214; Winter U.S. Patent 5,225,539; Jones et al. (1986) Nature 321:552-525; Nerhoeyan et al. (1988) Science 239:1534; and Beidler et al. (1988) /. Immunol. 141:4053-4060.
An anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibody can be used to detect 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein (e.g., in a cellular lysate or cell supernatant) in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression of the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 protein. Anti-139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 antibodies can be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissue as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g., to, for example, determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a detectable substance. Examples of detectable substances include various enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent materials, luminescent materials, bioluminescent materials, and radioactive materials. Examples of suitable enzymes include horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, β- galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase; examples of suitable prosthetic group complexes include streptavidin/biotin and avidin/biotin; examples of suitable fluorescent materials include umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride or phycoerythrin; an example of a luminescent material includes luminol; examples of bioluminescent materials include luciferase, luciferin, and aequorin, and examples of suitable radioactive material include
125I, 131I, 35S or 3H.
This invention is further illustrated by the following examples which should not be construed as limiting. The contents of all references, patents and published patent applications cited throughout this application, as well as the Figure and the Sequence Listing is incorporated herein by reference.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1: TISSUE DISTRIBUTION OF USING TAQMAN™ ANALYSIS
This example describes the TaqMan™ procedure. The Taqman™ procedure is a quantitative, reverse transcription PCR-based approach for detecting mRNA. The RT- PCR reaction exploits the 5' nuclease activity of AmpliTaq Gold™ DNA Polymerase to cleave a TaqMan™ probe during PCR. Briefly, cDNA was generated from the samples of interest, e.g., heart, kidney, liver, skeletal muscle, and various vessels, and used as the starting material for PCR amplification. In addition to the 5' and 3' gene-specific primers, a gene-specific oligonucleotide probe (complementary to the region being amplified) was included in the reaction (i.e., the Taqman™ probe). The TaqMan™ probe includes the oligonucleotide with a fluorescent reporter dye covalently linked to the 5' end of the probe (such as FAM (6-carboxyfluorescein), TET (6-carboxy-4,7,2',7'-tetrachlorofluorescein), JOE (6-carboxy-4,5-dichloro-2,7-dimethoxyfluorescein), or VIC) and a quencher dye (TAMRA (6-carboxy-N,N,N' ,N' -tetramethylrhodamine) at the 3 ' end of the probe.
During the PCR reaction, cleavage of the probe separates the reporter dye and the quencher dye, resulting in increased fluorescence of the reporter. Accumulation of PCR products is detected directly by monitoring the increase in fluorescence of the reporter dye. When the probe is intact, the proximity of the reporter dye to the quencher dye results in suppression of the reporter fluorescence. During PCR, if the target of interest is present, the probe specifically anneals between the forward and reverse primer sites. The 5'-3' nucleolytic activity of the AmpliTaq™ Gold DNA Polymerase cleaves the probe between the reporter and the quencher only if the probe hybridizes to the target. The probe fragments are then displaced from the target, and polymerization of the strand continues. The 3' end of the probe is blocked to prevent extension of the probe during PCR. This process occurs in every cycle and does not interfere with the exponential accumulation of product. RNA was prepared using the trizol method and treated with DNase to remove contaminating genomic DNA. cDNA was synthesized using standard techniques. Mock cDNA synthesis in the absence of reverse transcriptase resulted in samples with no detectable PCR amplification of the control gene confirms efficient removal of genomic DNA contamination.
Equivalents
Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments of the invention described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the following claims.

Claims

What is claimed:
1. A method for identifying a compound capable of treating a cardiovascular disorder, comprising assaying the ability of the compound to modulate 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid expression or 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide activity, thereby identifying a compound capable of treating a cardiovascular disorder.
2. A method for identifying a compound capable of modulating lipid production comprising: a) contacting a cell which expresses 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414,
7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 with a test compound; and b) assaying the ability of the test compound to modulate the expression of a
139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248,
60489 or 93804 nucleic acid or the activity of a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660,
8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide, thereby identifying a compound capable of modulating lipid production.
3. A method for modulating lipid production in a cell comprising contacting a cell with a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator, thereby modulating lipid production in the cell.
4. The method of claim 2, wherein the cell is a hepatic cell.
5. The method of claim 3, wherein the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator is a small organic molecule, peptide, antibody or antisense nucleic acid molecule.
6. The method of claim 3, wherein the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator is capable of modulating 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide activity.
7. The method of claim 6, wherein the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator is a small organic molecule, peptide, antibody or antisense nucleic acid molecule.
8. The method of claim 6, wherein the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398,
2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator is capable of modulating 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid expression.
9. A method for treating a subject having a cardiovascular disorder characterized by aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide activity or aberrant 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 nucleic acid expression comprising administering to the subject a 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator, thereby treating said subject having a cardiovascular disorder.
10. The method of claim 9, wherein said cardiovascular disorder is selected from the group consisting of arteriosclerosis, atherosclerosis, cardiac hypertrophy, ischemia reperfusion injury, restenosis, arterial inflammation, vascular wall remodeling, ventricular remodeling, rapid ventricular pacing, coronary microembolism, tachycardia, bradycardia, pressure overload, aortic bending, coronary artery ligation, vascular heart disease, valvular disease, including but not limited to, valvular degeneration caused by calcification, rheumatic heart disease, endocarditis, or complications of artificial valves; atrial fibrillation, long-QT syndrome, congestive heart failure, sinus node dysfunction, angina, heart failure, hypertension, atrial fibrillation, atrial flutter, pericardial disease, including but not limited to, pericardial effusion and pericarditis; cardiomyopathies, e.g., dilated cardiomyopathy or idiopathic cardiomyopathy, myocardial infarction, coronary artery disease, coronary artery spasm, ischemic disease, arrhythmia, sudden cardiac death, and cardiovascular developmental disorders
11. The method of claim 9, wherein said 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator is administered in a pharmaceutically acceptable formulation.
12. The method of claim 9, wherein the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator is a small organic molecule, peptide, antibody or antisense nucleic acid molecule.
13. The method of claim 9, wherein the 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 modulator is capable of modulating 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 polypeptide activity.
PCT/US2002/035538 2001-11-05 2002-11-05 Methods and compositions to treat cardiovascular disease using 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804 WO2003039341A2 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2002360343A AU2002360343A1 (en) 2001-11-05 2002-11-05 Methods and compositions to treat cardiovascular disease using 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804
JP2003541439A JP2005507673A (en) 2001-11-05 2002-11-05 139,258,1261,1486,2398,2414,7660,8587,10183,10550,12680,17921,32248,60489 or 93804 for treating cardiovascular disease
EP02795592A EP1450666A4 (en) 2001-11-05 2002-11-05 Methods and compositions to treat cardiovascular disease using 139,258,1261,1486,2398,2414,7660,8587,10183,10550,12680,17921,32248,60489 or 93804

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US33958201P 2001-11-05 2001-11-05
US60/339,582 2001-11-05

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2003039341A2 true WO2003039341A2 (en) 2003-05-15
WO2003039341A3 WO2003039341A3 (en) 2004-06-17

Family

ID=23329699

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2002/035538 WO2003039341A2 (en) 2001-11-05 2002-11-05 Methods and compositions to treat cardiovascular disease using 139, 258, 1261, 1486, 2398, 2414, 7660, 8587, 10183, 10550, 12680, 17921, 32248, 60489 or 93804

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20030119742A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1450666A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2005507673A (en)
AU (1) AU2002360343A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2003039341A2 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004015422A2 (en) * 2002-08-05 2004-02-19 Bayer Healthcare Ag Diagnostics and therapeutics for diseases associated with ovarian cancer g-protein coupled receptor 1 (ogr-1)
WO2004065551A3 (en) * 2003-01-21 2005-02-03 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Polynucleotide encoding a novel acyl coenzyme a, monoacylglycerol acyltransferase-3 (mgat3), and uses thereof
CN114377024A (en) * 2021-12-27 2022-04-22 南方医科大学南方医院 Medicine for treating and/or preventing hyperlipemia

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5912335A (en) * 1996-10-03 1999-06-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation G-protein coupled receptor HUVCT36
US6555339B1 (en) * 1997-04-14 2003-04-29 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Non-endogenous, constitutively activated human protein-coupled receptors
US6653086B1 (en) * 1998-04-14 2003-11-25 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Endogenous constitutively activated G protein-coupled orphan receptors
US20030186360A1 (en) * 2000-09-27 2003-10-02 Feder John N. Novel human G-protein coupled receptor, HGPRBMY3, expressed highly in immune -and colon-related tissues
US20030175748A1 (en) * 2000-09-27 2003-09-18 Feder John N. Novel human G-protein coupled receptor, HGPRBMY3, expressed highly in immune- and colon- related tissues

Non-Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DATABASE GENBANK [Online] 07 November 1994 HLA ET AL.: 'An abundant transcript induced in differentiating human endothelial cells encodes a polypeptide with structural similarities to G-protein-coupled receptors', XP002975038 Retrieved from NCBI Database accession no. M31210 *
HLA ET AL.: 'An abundant transcript induced in differentiating human endothelial cells encodes a polypeptide with structural similarities to G-protein-coupled receptors' JOURNAL OF BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY vol. 265, no. 16, 02 June 1990, pages 9308 - 9313, XP000917723 *
MATSUNO ET AL.: 'Induction of lasting complete regression of preformed distinct solid tumors by targeting the tumor vasculature using two new anti-endoglin monoclonal antibodies' CLINICAL CANCER RESEARCH vol. 5, no. 2, February 1999, pages 371 - 382, XP002975037 *
PYNE ET AL.: 'Sphingosine 1-phosphate signalling via the endothelial differentiation gene family of G-protein-coupled receptors' PHARMACOLOGY & THERAPEUTICS vol. 88, no. 2, November 2000, pages 115 - 131, XP002254562 *
See also references of EP1450666A2 *

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004015422A2 (en) * 2002-08-05 2004-02-19 Bayer Healthcare Ag Diagnostics and therapeutics for diseases associated with ovarian cancer g-protein coupled receptor 1 (ogr-1)
WO2004015422A3 (en) * 2002-08-05 2004-03-18 Bayer Healthcare Ag Diagnostics and therapeutics for diseases associated with ovarian cancer g-protein coupled receptor 1 (ogr-1)
WO2004065551A3 (en) * 2003-01-21 2005-02-03 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Polynucleotide encoding a novel acyl coenzyme a, monoacylglycerol acyltransferase-3 (mgat3), and uses thereof
CN114377024A (en) * 2021-12-27 2022-04-22 南方医科大学南方医院 Medicine for treating and/or preventing hyperlipemia
CN114377024B (en) * 2021-12-27 2023-10-24 南方医科大学南方医院 Medicine for treating and/or preventing hyperlipidemia

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2005507673A (en) 2005-03-24
US20030119742A1 (en) 2003-06-26
AU2002360343A1 (en) 2003-05-19
EP1450666A2 (en) 2004-09-01
WO2003039341A3 (en) 2004-06-17
EP1450666A4 (en) 2008-11-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20050142604A1 (en) Methods and compositions to treat cardiovascular disease using 1419, 58765 and 2210
EP1470240A2 (en) Methods and compositions for treating cardiovascular disease using 1682, 6169, 6193, 7771, 14395, 29002, 33216, 43726, 69292, 21656, 32427, 2402, 7747,1720, 9151, 60491, 1371, 7077, 33207, 1419, 18036, 16105, 38650, 14245, 58848, 1870, 25856, 32394, 3484, 345, 9252, 9135, 10532, 18610, 8165,2
US20060100152A1 (en) Methods and compositions in treating pain and painful disorders using 9949, 14230, 760, 62553, 12216, 17719, 41897, 47174, 33408, 10002, 16209, 314, 636, 27410, 33260, 619, 15985, 69112, 2158, 224, 615, 44373, 95431, 22245, 2387, 16658, 55054, 16314, 1613, 1675, 9569 or 13424 molecules
US20050037946A1 (en) Methods and compositions for treating cardiovascular disease using 1722, 10280, 59917, 85553, 10653, 9235, 21668, 17794, 2210, 6169, 10102, 21061, 17662, 1468, 12282, 6350, 9035, 1820, 23652, 7301, 8925, 8701, 3533, 9462, 9123, 12788, 17729, 65552, 1261, 21476, 33770, 9380, 2569654, 33556, 53656, 44143, 32612, 10671, 261, 44570, 41922, 2552, 2417, 19319, 43969, 8921, 8993, 955, 32345, 966, 1920, 17318, 1510, 14180, 26005, 554, 16408, 42028, 112091, 13886, 13942, 1673, 54946 or 2419
US20040091929A1 (en) Methods and compositions for the diagnosis and treatment of cardiovascular and tumorigenic disease using 4941
US20060088881A1 (en) Methods and compositions for treating urological disorders using 1435, 559, 34021, 44099, 25278, 641, 260, 55089, 21407, 42032, 46656, 62553, 302, 323, 12303, 985, 13237, 13601, 18926, 318, 2058 or 6351 molecules
WO2002012887A2 (en) Methods and compositions for the diagnosis and treatment of brown adipose cell disorders
EP1450666A2 (en) Methods and compositions to treat cardiovascular disease using 139,258,1261,1486,2398,2414,7660,8587,10183,10550,12680,17921,32248,60489 or 93804
US20020151480A1 (en) Methods and compositions for treating cardiovascular disease using 10218
US20070179102A1 (en) Methods and compositions for the treatment and diagnosis of pain disorders using 9805, 2047, 46566, 57749, 577, 20739, 57145, 1465, 1587, 2146, 2207, 32838, 336 or 52908
US20040180332A1 (en) Methods and compositions for treating aids and HIV-related disorders using 9145, 1725, 311, 837, 58305, 156, 14175, 50352, 32678, 5560, 7240, 8865, 12396, 12397, 13644, 19938, 2077, 1735, 1786, 10220, 17822, 33945, 43748, 47161, 81982 or 46777
US20040077001A1 (en) Use for carboxypeptidase-A4 in the diagnosis and treatment of metabolic disorders
WO2003053364A2 (en) Methods and compositions in treating pain and painful disorders using 1465,1587, 2146, 2207, 32838, 336 and 52908
US20030152970A1 (en) Methods and compositions to treat pain and painful disorders using 577, 20739 or 57145
JP2006519983A (en) 16386, 15402, 21165, 1423, 636, 12303, 21425, 27410, 38554, 35555, 55633, 57145, 59914, 94921, 16852, 33260, 58573, 30911, 85913, 14303, 16816, 17727, or 32620, Methods and compositions for treating pain and pain disorders
US20030104455A1 (en) Methods and compositions for treating urological disorders using 313, 333, 5464, 18817 or 33524
WO2001064872A2 (en) Gene 2465: methods and compositions for the diagnosis and treatment of cardiovascular, hepatic and bone disease
EP1451364A2 (en) Methods and compositions for treating hematological disorders using 232, 2059, 10630, 12848, 13875, 14395, 14618, 17692 or 58874

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ OM PH PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2002795592

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003541439

Country of ref document: JP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2002795592

Country of ref document: EP